(coordinates_in_window): Fix detection of vertical line
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
60dd7e0e 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-09-27
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e
DL
29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 31
1fa28578
GM
32\f
33* Changes in Emacs 21.1
34
4c724b32
DL
35** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
36`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
37
059cd2e1 38+++
6a0b0752
MB
39** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
40to be visited as images.
41
b856f39c 42+++
068127d6
GM
43** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
44operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
45
fd06c7da
MB
46** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
47(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
48remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
49may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
50
8ac08dea 51+++
62c273d7
DL
52** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
53is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
54
55+++
56** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
57mode `iswitchb-mode'.
58
8ac08dea 59+++
f393cf90
DL
60** Gnus changes.
61
62The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
63four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
64internationalization and mail-fetching.
65
66*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
67many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
68
69If you used procmail like in
70
71(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
72(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
73(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
74(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
75
327652be 76this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
77
78(setq mail-sources
79 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
80 :suffix ".in")))
81
82More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
83Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
84
85*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
86Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
87
60dd7e0e
DL
88*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
89parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
90Separate MIME packages like SEMI will not work. There are built-in
91facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is now just a
92compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
93
94*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
95called to position point.
96
97*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
98summary buffers and NOV files.
99
100*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
101of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
102
103*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
104subtly different manner.
105
106*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
107and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
108ever-changing layouts.
109
110*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
111
112*** There is image support.
113
114** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1158859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
116more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
117empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
118window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
119on.
120
ba9eeda1
GM
121** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
122set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
123file that is already visited under a different name.
124
42ac0ae5
GM
125** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
126nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
127
128** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
129recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
130signaled.
131
ba9eeda1 132** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
133support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
134use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
135buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
136M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
137new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
138
b941a14b 139+++
ba9eeda1 140** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 141and displays information about that.
b941a14b 142
ba9eeda1 143** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
144file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
145
d7b38c05 146** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 147added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
148Postscript files are included.
149
150** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
151`dired-ref.tex'.
152
25ad1371
GM
153** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
154expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
155
156This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
157determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
158mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
159interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
160regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
161associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
162
b856f39c 163+++
f0298744
DL
164** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
165displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
166menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
167menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
168
9a8d84ca
DL
169** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
170a version-dependent component.
171
d76c03ea
GM
172** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
173Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
174will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
175character is still bound as before.
176
3b4fa1b2
DL
177** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
178using that menu.
179
40e857ea 180** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 181suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 182
beb2eb00 183+++
c08398de
DL
184** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
185buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
186contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
187by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
188insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
189the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
190Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
191
db7a3ede 192+++
3d6cd763
GM
193** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
194coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
195escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
196such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
197recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 198always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 199read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
200(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
201RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 202
0b8a3a6d
DL
203** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
204environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
205
424d8b44 206+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
207** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
208point in a pop-up window.
209
6d35b49f 210+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
211** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
212displays all characters in that character set.
213
214** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
215coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
216
a4067978 217+++
5cb6a58e 218** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
219on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
220defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 221
424d8b44 222+++
a1b8d58b
GM
223** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
224
6e417ca5
DL
225** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
226been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
227
424d8b44 228+++
5898e075
DL
229** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
230`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
231indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
232indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
233
424d8b44 234+++
abfcc168
GM
235** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
236sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 237(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
238You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
239
424d8b44 240+++
cc181e95
GM
241** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
242on the display using several methods
243
424d8b44 244+++
cc181e95
GM
245- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
246a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
247be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
248
424d8b44 249+++
cc181e95
GM
250- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
251equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
252
da4496b6 253- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
254
255- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
256the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
257
424d8b44 258+++
3b4fa1b2 259** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 260an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 261command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 262does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 263
424d8b44 264+++
176256a1 265** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
266`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
267typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 268
dd0add8e
DL
269** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
270characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
271
bf3ba9ac 272+++
699238d9
GM
273** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
274compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
275this behavior.
276
277The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
278compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
279Emacs dump core.
280
424d8b44 281+++
699238d9 282** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 283
7233c5bd
GM
284*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
285whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
286is useful for debugging X problems.
287
288Example:
289
699238d9 290 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 291
100b3cbb
GM
292*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
293visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
294the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
295and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
296visual class names are
297
298 TrueColor
299 PseudoColor
300 DirectColor
301 StaticColor
302 GrayScale
303 StaticGray
304
305Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
306`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
307meaning.
308
309The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
310supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
311`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
312visual.
313
314Example:
315
699238d9 316 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
317
318*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
319specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
320default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
321resource values are `true' or `on'.
322
323Example:
324
699238d9 325 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 326
0d0c76b8
EZ
327** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
328more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
329now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
330
42088c12 331** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 332display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
333shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
334be customized.
c60ea02e 335
424d8b44 336+++
31047e0d
DL
337** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
338
424d8b44 339+++
b02786f9
GM
340** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
341all frames except the selected one.
342
3261c1d8
DL
343** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
344to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
345
ffe36136 346** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
347the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
348MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
349displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
350
0292b49f 351+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
352** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
353MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 354
559cee90
DL
355** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
356read mail from the menu etc.
357
480b5773 358+++
271b4185
GM
359** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
360a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
361
0daee095
GM
362** Changes in Texinfo mode.
363
364** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
365macros
366
367 Key binding Macro
368 -------------------------
369 C-c C-c C-s @strong
370 C-c C-c C-e @emph
371 C-c C-c u @url
372 C-c C-c q @quotation
373 C-c C-c m @email
374
559cee90
DL
375** Changes in Outline mode.
376
377There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
378`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
379the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
380
327652be 381** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 382
c0a8c108
EZ
383+++
384*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
385with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
386are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
387Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
388buffers to kill, as before.
389
390Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 391i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
392this way.
393
956777b3
GM
394** Changes to Show Paren mode.
395
396*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
397The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
398use. Default is 1000.
399
f6989277 400+++
404fa7d6
DL
401** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
402groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
403
424d8b44
DL
404+++
405** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
406M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
407M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
408buffers.
8964fec7 409
424d8b44 410+++
39783d73
WP
411** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
412under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
413.emacs file.
414
415The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
416determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
417
d35fce81
GM
418** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
419abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
420`directory-abbrev-alist'.
421
a933dad1
DL
422** Faces and frame parameters.
423
424There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
425Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
426`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
427`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
428sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
429for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
430parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
431
432Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
433`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 434`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
435`default' face and vice versa.
436
d80061fa 437+++
f77a4a8a
GM
438** New face `menu'.
439
440The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
441Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
442attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
443
424d8b44 444+++
a933dad1
DL
445** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
446
447The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
448colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
449correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
450the screen gamma of a frame's display.
451
452PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
453in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
454color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
455
456The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
457`ScreenGamma'.
458
459** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
460
461The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
462Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
463oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
464of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
465the text.
466
467** Emacs has a new face implementation.
468
469The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
470font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
471height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
472These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
473specify a font.
474
475Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
476These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
477under Lisp changes, below.
478
479** New default font is Courier 12pt.
480
424d8b44
DL
481+++
482** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
483of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
484otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
485
486** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
487truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
488foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
489customizing face `fringe'.
490
491** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
492can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
493
494** LessTif support.
495
424d8b44
DL
496Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
497You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
498
499** Toolkit scroll bars.
500
501Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
502LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
503configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
504bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
505bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
506Emacs.
507
508When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
509Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
510Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
511Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
512define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
513`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
514
515Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
516a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
517directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
518different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
519system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
520add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
521
522The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
523`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
524This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
525image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
526Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
527
528** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
529
530When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
531widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
532Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
533
424d8b44 534+++
a933dad1
DL
535** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
536
537When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
538whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
539defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
540highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
541displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
542whitespace.
543
6e612d4d 544+++
a933dad1
DL
545** Busy-cursor.
546
547Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
548display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
549
424d8b44 550+++
a933dad1
DL
551** Blinking cursor
552
553M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
554terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
555and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
556the group `cursor'.
557
8ac08dea 558+++
a933dad1
DL
559** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
560
561This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
562generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
563See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
564details.
565
566Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
567have to do anything to activate it.
568
569** Tabs and variable-width text.
570
571Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
572defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
573independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
574Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
575
576** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
577
424d8b44 578+++
a933dad1
DL
579*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
580
581 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
582
79dd1637
RS
583The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
584LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 585
79dd1637
RS
586*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
587LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 588
34d90e29 589+++
a933dad1
DL
590** Hscrolling in C code.
591
cc181e95
GM
592Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
593`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
594customized.
a933dad1 595
8ac08dea 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597** Tool bar support.
598
599Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
600how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
d1e68bce
DL
601Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is displayed.
602To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
603for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 604
424d8b44 605+++
a933dad1
DL
606** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
607
608Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
609mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
610line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
611about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
612in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
613
614Currently, the following actions have been defined:
615
616- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
617buffers.
618
619- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
620M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
621
622- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
623
424d8b44
DL
624- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
625`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
626
627- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
628
629** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
630
631When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 632from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
633non-nil.
634
635** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
636
637Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
638Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
639the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
640italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
641Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
642attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
643on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
644
645** Sound support
646
2f516940 647Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 648driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 649supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 650
424d8b44 651+++
a933dad1
DL
652** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
653the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
654forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
655value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
656users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
657even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
658
659The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
660
0e18b431 661+++
a933dad1
DL
662** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
663
664As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
665drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
666`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
667
fdd8bb68 668+++
a933dad1
DL
669** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
670bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
671
672This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
673`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
674variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
675
c5d00c64 676+++
a933dad1
DL
677** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
678
679When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
680value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
681number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 682fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
683
684When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
685value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
686number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 687fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
688
689** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
690notably at the end of lines.
691
692All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
693spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
694
424d8b44 695+++
eee54b0e
DL
696There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
697
a933dad1
DL
698** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
699query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
700after each match to get the replacement text.
701
00782214 702+++
d5483ab1
GM
703** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
704you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 705
424d8b44 706** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
707you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
708lisp-complete-symbol.
709
7af69644 710+++
a933dad1
DL
711** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
712
163ea954
RS
713If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
714longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
715it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
716window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
717
718- User option: max-mini-window-height
719
720Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
721fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
722specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
723
724Default is 0.25.
725
2f72fd2f
GM
726** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
727
0d43b60d
GM
728** Changes to hideshow.el
729
730Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
731selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
732conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
733
734*** Generalized block selection and traversal
735
736A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
737(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
738which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
739`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
740point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
741(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
742
743If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
744i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
745backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
746the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
747
748*** Isearch support for updating mode line
749
750During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
751blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
752line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
753portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
754is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
755
756To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
757something like this in your .emacs.
758
759 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
760 (lambda ()
761 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
762
327652be
TTN
763*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
764
765Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
766header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
767`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
768moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
769block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
770behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
771useful.
772
773You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
774function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
775of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
776code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
777appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
778
779(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
780 (hs-hide-level 1)
781 (forward-sexp 1))
782(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
783
784The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
785emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
786only for code blocks.
787
788*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
789
790Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
791parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
792display for implementation.
793
794*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
795
796The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
797LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
798which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
799new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
800
801 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
802 hs-show-block C-c C-s
803 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
804 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
805 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
806 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
807 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
808
809These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
810
559cee90
DL
811** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
812
424d8b44 813+++
1b24b888
GM
814*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
815an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
816log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
817
424d8b44 818+++
1b24b888
GM
819**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
820current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
821
822+++
1b24b888
GM
823*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
824in a log file.
eb2aac9d 825
502004be 826+++
1b24b888
GM
827*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
828entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 829
502004be 830+++
1b24b888 831*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
832version number is performed based on regular expressions from
833`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
834Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 835
1b24b888
GM
836*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock
837highlighting.
838
3476b54a
GM
839** Changes in Font Lock
840
841*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
842font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
843mode.
844
b3b98592
GM
845** Comint (subshell) changes
846
66b6c480 847By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
f8d54c98 848distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
66b6c480
MB
849the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
850attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
851Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
852boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
853To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
854`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
855
b3b98592
GM
856Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
857and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
858
859The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
860buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
861buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
862
863The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
864M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
865the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
866
8c1bec7c
MB
867Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
868now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
869previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
870user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 871
e26cec67
GM
872** Changes to Rmail mode
873
c0510d27
GM
874*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
875set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
876receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
877recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
878`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
879as correspondent.
880
881Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
882mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 883regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 884
3b55acc9
GM
885*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
886to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
887Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
888with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
889for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
890
6a1950ec
GM
891*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
892like `j'.
893
5bb6f079
RS
894*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
895specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 896digest message.
e26cec67 897
993d8b7d
DL
898*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
899in which folder to put messages automatically.
900
400a1ed0
GM
901** Changes to TeX mode
902
903The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
904`latex-mode'.
905
a933dad1
DL
906** Changes to RefTeX mode
907
908*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
909 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
910 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
911 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
912 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
913 can be edited from that buffer.
914
915*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
916 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
917 `A' to use all marked entries).
918
919*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
920 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
921
922*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
923 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
924 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
925 been cited.
926
38de9631
GM
927** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
928The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
929semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
930in column 1 are always made leaves.
931
a933dad1
DL
932** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
933has the following new features:
934
935*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
936may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
937to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
938time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
939
940*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
941feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
942file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
943compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
944pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
945defaults to 1.
946
5d94f558 947** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
948file names.
949
424d8b44 950+++
a933dad1
DL
951** Tooltips.
952
953Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
954mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
955can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
956
957Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
958variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
959the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
960tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
961
424d8b44 962+++
a933dad1
DL
963** Customize changes
964
965*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
966`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
967cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
968
969*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
970Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
971default).
972
0ae51efb
GM
973*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
974between custom options. Example:
975
976 (defcustom default-input-method nil
977 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
978 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
979 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
980 :group 'mule
981 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
982 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
983
984This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
985current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
986first in a custom-set-variables statement.
987
a933dad1
DL
988** New features in evaluation commands
989
5e03eb84 990*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
991modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
992print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
993customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
994eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
995
5e03eb84
GM
996*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
997code when called with a prefix argument.
998
ead53494
GM
999** Ispell changes
1000
37d8a691 1001+++
bbe15990
EZ
1002*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1003transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1004spell-checks the current buffer.
1005
37d8a691 1006+++
385ff9e3
GM
1007*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1008added.
1009
1010*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1011correction is made and re-checked.
1012
74ec6045 1013*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1014
1015*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1016cases.
1017
1018*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1019on syntax errors.
1020
1021*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1022end of the buffer.
1023
a933dad1
DL
1024** Dired changes
1025
1026*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1027command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1028is, delete only empty directories.
1029
1030*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1031command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1032copy directories recursively.
1033
f6737cde
GM
1034*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1035in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1036the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1037
2f72fd2f
GM
1038*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1039replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1040directory.
1041
7381ae05
MB
1042*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1043a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1044This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1045will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1046accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1047
e024b101
GM
1048*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1049from ls switches.
1050
a933dad1
DL
1051** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1052use the -f option when sending mail.
1053
b1c609b1
GM
1054** CC mode changes.
1055
1056Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1057current user setups (although it's believed that these
1058incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1059However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1060back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1061compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1062release.
1063
7972fcfc
GM
1064*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1065This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1066of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1067non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1068want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1069have to bother.
1070
1071Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1072situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1073and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1074If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1075the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1076by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1077
b1c609b1
GM
1078*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1079When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1080variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1081take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1082is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1083settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1084possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1085Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1086
1087By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1088special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1089the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1090of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1091above.
1092
1093Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1094when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1095function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1096call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1097then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1098values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1099only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1100function documentation for more info.
1101
1102The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1103especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1104with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1105intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1106such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1107is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1108configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1109global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1110
1111(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1112
1113**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1114This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1115
1116This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1117variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1118completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1119the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1120empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1121style system.
1122
1123**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1124In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1125c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1126as far as possible.
1127
1128*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1129CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1130surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1131chapter about this in the manual.
1132
1133**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1134The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1135recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1136primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1137adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1138
1139**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1140This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1141c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1142
1143**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1144This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1145
1146It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1147Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1148A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1149inside CC Mode.
1150
1151Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1152causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1153the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1154available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1155cc-mode/).
1156
1157**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1158The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1159specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1160literals.
1161
1162**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1163It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1164prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1165you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1166this function.
1167
1168*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1169It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1170to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1171struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1172Thanks to Eric Eide.
1173
1174*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1175It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1176opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1177
1178**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1179
1180*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1181See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1182better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1183and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1184
1185*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1186previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1187the column specified by comment-column.
1188
1189*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1190In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1191is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1192prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1193contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1194don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1195
1196*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1197instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1198arguments.
1199
1200*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1201
1202*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1203c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1204c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1205variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1206Provan).
1207
1208*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1209
c407c570
GM
1210** Makefile mode changes
1211
1212*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1213
5d94f558 1214*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1215Fontlock mode is active.
1216
87be76f6
GM
1217** Isearch changes
1218
3353ef5a
GM
1219*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1220so that searches can be resumed.
1221
1222*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1223respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1224that started the search.
1225
87be76f6 1226*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1227selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1228
c8a8458a 1229+++
87be76f6
GM
1230*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1231
d35fce81 1232Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1233`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1234search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1235before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1236highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1237`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1238
1239The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1240will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1241Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1242using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1243usual snappy response.
1244
1245If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1246matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1247set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1248isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1249
21bc6203 1250+++
35384f06
GM
1251** Changes in sort.el
1252
1253The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1254as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1255new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1256numeric base.
87be76f6 1257
d7b511c4
GM
1258** Changes to Ange-ftp
1259
424d8b44 1260+++
d7b511c4 1261*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1262names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1263sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1264
d7b511c4
GM
1265*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1266ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1267
9d453139
SS
1268*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1269output ^M at the end of lines.
1270
4b9347b3
GM
1271** Shell script mode changes.
1272
1273Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1274derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1275sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1276
79214ddf
FP
1277** Etags changes.
1278
1279*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1280
aca0be23 1281*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1282possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1283{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1284This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1285a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1286
79214ddf
FP
1287*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1288declarations when given the --declarations option.
1289
1290*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1291"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1292
1293*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1294types.
1295
de370c4c 1296*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1297
1298*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1299
1300*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1301are now tagged.
1302
1303*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1304variables are tagged.
1305
1306*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1307
8dc78b52
FP
1308*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1309for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1310
c8d94f86 1311+++
f6737cde
GM
1312** Changes in etags.el
1313
3f6e4b8b
GM
1314*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1315tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1316is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1317
f6737cde
GM
1318*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1319the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1320
1321If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1322FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1323TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1324obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1325
1326TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1327
1328FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1329List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1330
1331A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1332
1333 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1334 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1335 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1336
1337*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1338of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1339
1340*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1341names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1342
424d8b44 1343+++
fbc164de
PE
1344** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1345and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1346LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1347
c3eb1f10 1348+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1349** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1350Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13518859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1352GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13538859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1354releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1355(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1356
424d8b44 1357+++
163ea954 1358** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1359remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1360appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1361
1362** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1363
424d8b44 1364+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1365** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1366
6ab8d72d 1367+++
f6499c03 1368** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1369containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1370expression from that list, are not checked.
1371
5d94f558
SS
1372** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1373When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1374and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1375the buffer, just like for the local files.
1376
dc28878c
GM
1377** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1378
df8a9f78 1379+++
95931eb1
GM
1380** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1381displays local abbrevs, only.
1382
54baed30
GM
1383** VC Changes
1384
1385VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1386easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1387Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1388to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1389changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1390`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1391version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1392each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1393file is registered in that backend.
1394
1395When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1396backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1397directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1398master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1399the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1400As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1401
1402The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1403still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1404RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1405vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1406where it doesn't make sense.)
1407
1408The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1409obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1410`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1411
1412*** General Changes
1413
1414The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1415checks are always done now.
1416
327652be 1417VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1418operations.
1419
1420*** Changes for CVS
1421
1422There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1423default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1424remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1425by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1426regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1427that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1428queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1429
1430If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1431repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1432If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1433commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1434current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1435entire directory tree.
1436
1437The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1438"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1439is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1440"watched" by other developers.)
1441
1442*** Lisp Changes in VC
1443
1444VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1445add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1446library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1447then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1448a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1449provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1450of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1451you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1452`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1453
a933dad1
DL
1454** New modes and packages
1455
ff332647 1456+++
90cbf47e
GM
1457*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1458intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1459typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1460on certain projects.
1461
894ca69e 1462+++
90cbf47e 1463*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1464regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1465
d96d6bb0 1466 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1467
1468will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1469face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1470typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1471Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1472appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1473current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1474corresponding file is read.
1475
424d8b44 1476+++
d96d6bb0 1477*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1478Emacs is idle.
1479
31fc5d15
GM
1480*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1481parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1482
5cb6a58e
SM
1483*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1484package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1485be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1486
424d8b44 1487+++
578979ee
GM
1488*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1489facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1490separate Texinfo file.
1491
424d8b44
DL
1492+++
1493*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1494by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1495provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1496`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1497enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1498
424d8b44 1499+++
6abca616
EZ
1500*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1501without invoking external programs.
1502
1503The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1504and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1505`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1506is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1507Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1508
1509The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1510page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1511
719e2c6e 1512+++
5e5dff44
GM
1513*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1514authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1515
1516The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1517the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1518the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1519Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1520even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1521single step.
1522
1523On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1524matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1525probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1526contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1527
424d8b44 1528+++
f7136ee8
GM
1529*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1530unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1531actually modifying content of a buffer.
1532
bbd9b566
GM
1533*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1534PostScript.
1535
1536Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1537
1538The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1539
1540 ; comment (until end of line)
1541 A non-terminal
1542 "C" terminal
1543 ?C? special
1544 $A default non-terminal
1545 $"C" default terminal
1546 $?C? default special
1547 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1548 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1549 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1550 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1551 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1552 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1553 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1554 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1555 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1556 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1557 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1558 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1559 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1560 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1561 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1562
1563Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1564
99453a38
GM
1565*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1566align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1567determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1568example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1569equal signs of assignments.
1570
424d8b44 1571+++
559cee90
DL
1572*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1573paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1574
424d8b44 1575+++
6448a6b3
GM
1576*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1577list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1578buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1579customize the package.
1580
6344985d
GM
1581*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1582
249652b1
GM
1583*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1584replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1585is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1586and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1587not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1588which answers different needs.
1589
424d8b44 1590+++
3476b54a
GM
1591*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1592suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1593expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1594course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1595reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1596to be enabled.
1597
424d8b44 1598+++
8964fec7
SM
1599*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1600containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1601
424d8b44 1602+++
a933dad1
DL
1603*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1604
424d8b44 1605+++
a933dad1
DL
1606*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1607
1608*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1609
8901d1ac
GM
1610Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1611`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1612disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1613`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1614displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1615and background colors.
1616
a933dad1
DL
1617*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1618Pascal) language.
1619
f6499c03 1620+++
a933dad1
DL
1621*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1622the text at point.
1623
1624*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1625
424d8b44 1626+++
8d54eb69
DL
1627*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1628
a933dad1
DL
1629*** whitespace.el ???
1630
ebcfda83
GM
1631*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1632files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1633(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1634interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1635often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1636uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1637codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1638
1639*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1640
1641Here is an example of columns:
1642
1643horse apple bus
1644dog pineapple car EXTRA
1645porcupine strawberry airplane
1646
1647Doing the following settings:
1648
1649 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1650 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1651 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1652 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1653
1654
1655Selecting the lines above and typing:
1656
1657 M-x delimit-columns-region
1658
1659It results:
1660
1661[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1662[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1663[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1664
1665delim-col has the following options:
1666
1667 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1668 before all columns.
1669
1670 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1671 between each column.
1672
1673 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1674 after all columns.
1675
1676 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1677 each column.
1678
1679delim-col has the following commands:
1680
1681 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1682 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1683
424d8b44 1684+++
f507826c 1685*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1686were operated on recently.
1687
1688M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1689
31fc5d15
GM
1690M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1691recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1692
31fc5d15
GM
1693M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1694filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1695file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1696
31fc5d15
GM
1697- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1698- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1699- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1700
31fc5d15
GM
1701The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1702dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1703
8062f458
DL
1704*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1705text.
1706
424d8b44 1707+++
36e24b82 1708*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1709of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1710specific to Message mode.
1711
424d8b44 1712+++
36e24b82
DL
1713*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1714viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1715with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1716
424d8b44 1717+++
aaa659ef
DL
1718*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1719interface to access directory servers using different directory
1720protocols. It has a separate manual.
1721
eee54b0e
DL
1722*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1723for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1724
424d8b44 1725+++
612839b6
GM
1726*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1727
5d94f558 1728*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1729minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1730
399da7e3
DL
1731*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1732with the diary features.
1733
6e417ca5
DL
1734*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1735numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1736
4a27bdfb
GM
1737*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1738Fill mode.
1739
60dd7e0e
DL
1740*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1741Gnus facilities.
1742
a933dad1
DL
1743** Withdrawn packages
1744
1745*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1746functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1747
3261c1d8
DL
1748*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1749
1750*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1751
1752\f
1753* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1754(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1755
4fbdfdcf
MB
1756+++
1757** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1758the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1759message.
1760
6a0b0752
MB
1761** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1762expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1763
47e351a3
GM
1764** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1765with the more general `:mask' property.
1766
ba9eeda1
GM
1767** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1768
a2bd77b8
GM
1769** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1770backslash.
1771
424d8b44
DL
1772+++
1773** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1774is running in batch mode. For example,
1775
1776 (message "%s" (read t))
1777
1778will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1779to standard output.
1780
1781+++
1782** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1783`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1784
ead53494
GM
1785** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1786will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1787frame or window.
1788
f6499c03 1789+++
27848c01
GM
1790** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1791were added
1792
1793- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1794
1795Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1796a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1797
1798- Function: remq ELT LIST
1799
1800Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1801comparison is done with `eq'.
1802
1803** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1804
b548072f
GM
1805** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1806has been changed.
1807
424d8b44 1808+++
07b14857
KH
1809** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1810without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1811convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1812
9662da0b
GM
1813** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1814or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1815
7fce7efb
DL
1816** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1817function was declared obsolete.
1818
5d94f558 1819** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1820retained as an alias).
1821
f98d3086
SM
1822** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1823It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1824is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1825
87efd256
GM
1826** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1827
1828- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1829
1830Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1831MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1832
67c9a1d2
GM
1833** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1834
1835- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1836
1837Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1838
1839This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1840calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1841argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1842value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1843returned.
1844
1845Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1846if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1847it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1848minibuffer even if it is active.
1849
1850Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1851counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1852too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1853and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1854`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1855entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1856
1857ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1858ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1859ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1860ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1861ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1862If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1863Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1864
ead53494
GM
1865** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1866event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1867argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1868
25fa6deb
GM
1869** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1870call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1871message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1872Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1873
5d94f558 1874** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1875meaning no limit.
1876
5d94f558 1877** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1878coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1879DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1880
80c05bd3 1881** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1882of a primitive.
1883
80c05bd3
DL
1884** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1885buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1886This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1887than replacing the local map.
1888
4bc7a543
DL
1889** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1890after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1891
1892** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1893
f6499c03 1894+++
f0298744
DL
1895** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1896promised long ago.
1897
5d94f558 1898** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1899\f
1900* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1901
1902Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1903--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1904When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1905so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1906
85c75536
MB
1907*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1908buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1909the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1910restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1911
0b8a3a6d
DL
1912*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1913`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1914when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1915multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1916
1917*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1918`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1919contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1920
1921*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1922changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1923[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1924regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1925the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1926extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1927bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1928eight-bit-graphic.
1929
1930** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1931
1932A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1933a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1934character set as previously.
1935
1936*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1937They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1938modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1939
1940CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1941characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1942range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1943case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1944
1945FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1946name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1947
1948*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1949registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1950"fontset-default".
1951
1952*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1953argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1954
1955** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1956composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1957buffers and strings.
1958
1959*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1960character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1961code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1962have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1963composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1964composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1965The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1966also been deleted.
1967
1968*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1969specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1970`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1971
1972*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1973MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1974composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1975may differ between buffer and string text.
1976
1977*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1978COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1979
1980*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1981directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1982Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1983`composition' from STRING.
1984
1985*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1986a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1987
1988*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1989obsolete.
1990
1991** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1992Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1993character set is not used.
1994
1995** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1996`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1997X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1998
1999+++
2000** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2001are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 20020xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2003
399da7e3 2004+++
f0124b4a
DL
2005** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2006that offset in the file before writing.
2007
f98d3086
SM
2008** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2009compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2010
612839b6
GM
2011** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2012`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2013from which the command was issued.
2014
2015** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2016`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2017`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2018additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2019operate on.
2020
271b4185
GM
2021** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2022to `window-buffer-height'.
2023
2024- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2025
2026Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2027The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2028lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2029
2030Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2031respectively.
2032
2033If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2034COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2035
2036The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2037obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2038on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2039
2040Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2041buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2042possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2043is currently displayed in some window.
2044
3c30cb6e
DL
2045** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2046argument function's results.
2047
62f20204
GM
2048** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2049signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2050
c0510d27 2051** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2052header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2053
2054** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2055ignores differences in case and text representation.
2056
2057** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2058cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2059as follows:
2060
2061 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2062 nil don't display a cursor
2063 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2064 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2065 others display a box cursor.
2066
9a0dd3dc
GM
2067** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2068an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2069defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2070set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2071
d7b511c4 2072** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2073specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2074the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2075text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2076
2077Example:
2078
2079 (string-to-syntax "()")
2080 => (4 . 41)
2081
1fa28578
GM
2082** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2083other than 10.
2084
2085*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2086INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2087
5d94f558 2088 #b1111
1fa28578 2089 => 15
5d94f558 2090 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2091 => -15
2092
2093*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2094
5d94f558 2095 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2096 => 438
2097
2098*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2099
5d94f558 2100 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2101 => 48815
2102
2103*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2104
5d94f558 2105 #2R-111
1fa28578 2106 => -7
5d94f558 2107 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2108 => 267
2109
3d4ff2dd 2110** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2111the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2112and isn't a string.
2113
3d4ff2dd
GM
2114** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2115a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2116value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2117not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2118
16ce590d
DL
2119+++
2120** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2121
73825616 2122** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2123for a regexp in a string.
2124
2125** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2126`mouse-position-function'.
2127
723e779c
GM
2128** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2129that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2130
d1e103b2
GM
2131** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2132Keywords are now always considered constants.
2133
31047e0d
DL
2134+++
2135** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2136returns it.
2137
7a85e4df
GM
2138** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2139returned by function `recent-keys'.
2140
02b14400
RS
2141+++
2142** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2143can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2144Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2145etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2146mode.
404fa7d6 2147
02b14400 2148+++
8964fec7
SM
2149** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2150and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2151
02b14400
RS
2152+++
2153** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2154has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2155function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2156returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2157been performed."
2158
2159When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2160and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2161hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2162then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2163
02b14400 2164+++
81da8b32
GM
2165** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2166In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2167and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2168
02b14400 2169+++
9e207b90
GM
2170** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2171with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2172specified table.
2173
2174 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2175
2176Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2177TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2178saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2179what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2180
02b14400 2181+++
d7f89643 2182** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2183Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2184
02b14400 2185+++
dde9e75a
GM
2186** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2187removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2188
02b14400 2189+++
9da30515
GM
2190** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2191instead of being optional.
2192
02b14400 2193+++
d20679eb
GM
2194** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2195modify read-only text.
2196
02b14400 2197+++
fbc164de
PE
2198** New functions and variables for locales.
2199
2200The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2201decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2202time functions like strftime. The new variables
2203`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2204locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2205
2206The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2207environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2208the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2209environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2210not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2211`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2212`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2213
02b14400 2214+++
863476d1
SM
2215** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2216To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2217modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2218start sequences.
2219
02b14400 2220+++
ef6d912c
GM
2221** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2222because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2223
02b14400 2224+++
a933dad1
DL
2225** New function `propertize'
2226
2227The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2228strings with text properties.
2229
2230- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2231
2232Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2233by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2234PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2235specified value of that property. Example:
2236
2237 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2238
2239+++
2240** push and pop macros.
2241
02b14400
RS
2242Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2243are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2244as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2245
2246(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2247(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2248 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2249
02b14400
RS
2250** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2251
6c7fd5aa
RS
2252Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2253are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2254
2255(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2256 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2257 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2258 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2259
2260(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2261 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2262 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2263 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2264
a933dad1
DL
2265+++
2266** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2267as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2268
2269[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2270[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2271[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2272[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2273[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2274 space, and DEL.
2275[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2276 and DEL.
2277[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2278 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2279 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2280[:alpha:] matches letters.
2281 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2282 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2283[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2284[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2285[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2286[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2287 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2288 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2289[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2290[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2291[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2292
2293+++
2294** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2295
2296The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2297
2298- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2299
2300The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2301are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2302
2303:test TEST
2304
2305TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2306Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2307it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2308
2309:size SIZE
2310
2311SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2312many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2313
2314:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2315
2316REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2317full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2318size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
23191.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2320old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2321
2322:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2323
2324THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2325hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2326(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2327
2328:weakness WEAK
2329
b548072f
GM
2330WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2331`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2332`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2333collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2334outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2335
2336- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2337
2338Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2339
2340- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2341
2342Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2343
2344- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2345
2346Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2347values are shared.
2348
2349- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2350
2351Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2352
2353- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2354
2355Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2356
2357- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2358
2359Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2360
2361- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2362
2363Returns the size of TABLE.
2364
d96d6bb0 2365- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2366
2367Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2368
2369- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2370
2371Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2372
2373- Function: clrhash TABLE
2374
2375Clear TABLE.
2376
2377- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2378
2379Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2380not found.
2381
79214ddf 2382- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2383
2384Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2385another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2386
2387- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2388
2389Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2390
2391- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2392
2393Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2394arguments KEY and VALUE.
2395
2396- Function: sxhash OBJ
2397
2398Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2399
2400- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2401
2402Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2403a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2404comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2405and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2406of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2407
2408TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2409
2410HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2411code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2412integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2413
2414Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2415be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2416
2417 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2418 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2419
2420 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2421 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2422
79214ddf 2423 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2424 'case-fold-string-hash))
2425
2426 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2427
2428+++
2429** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2430
2431It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2432circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2433a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2434
2435+++
2436** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2437
2438If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2439#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2440
a933dad1
DL
2441+++
2442** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2443t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2444specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2445is too short to reach that column.
2446
2447+++
2448** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2449now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2450after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2451two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2452
2453If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2454perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2455and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2456
2457+++
2458** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2459to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2460
2461+++
2462** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2463calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2464
2465+++
2466** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2467directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2468small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2469small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2470temporary-file-directory instead.
2471
2472+++
2473** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2474the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2475`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2476hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2477
2478+++
2479** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2480elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2481
2482+++
2483** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2484
2485make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2486creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2487ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2488
2489+++
2490** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2491
2492The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2493on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2494is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2495never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2496ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2497overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2498
2499If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2500that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2501to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2502The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2503
2504+++
2505** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2506
2507Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2508If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2509ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2510result string.
2511
2512Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2513string where arguments appear in the result string.
2514
2515Example:
2516
2517 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2518 (s2 "world"))
2519 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2520 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2521 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2522
2523results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2524
2525+++
2526** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2527
2528Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2529The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2530argument in it.
2531
2532 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2533 (arg "world"))
2534 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2535 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2536 (message msg arg))
2537
2538+++
2539** Sound support
2540
2541Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2542(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2543
2544Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2545(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2546to enable sound support.
2547
2548Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2549list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2550when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2551functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2552sound to play, before playing the sound.
2553
2554The following sound properties are supported:
2555
2556- `:file FILE'
2557
2558FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2559searched relative to `data-directory'.
2560
6fb40beb
GM
2561- `:data DATA'
2562
2563DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2564may be present, but not both.
2565
a933dad1
DL
2566- `:volume VOLUME'
2567
2568VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
25690..1. This property is optional.
2570
2571Other properties are ignored.
2572
2573** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2574
2575** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2576a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2577
2578** Changes to garbage collection
2579
2580*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2581of live and free strings.
2582
2583*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2584strings that have been consed so far.
2585
a933dad1 2586\f
04545643
GM
2587* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2588Lisp Manual
2589
82a452c8
GM
2590*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2591
9a8d84ca
DL
2592+++
2593** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2594
2595** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2596image.
2597
2598- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2599
2600Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2601
2602SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2603measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2604character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2605font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2606FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2607
ebb8f116
GM
2608** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2609has a mask bitmap.
2610
2611- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2612
2613Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2614FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2615or omitted means use the selected frame.
2616
f6499c03 2617+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2618** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2619satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2620
2621+++
2622** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2623optional.
2624
f6499c03
DL
2625+++
2626** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2627below).
04545643
GM
2628
2629\f
a933dad1
DL
2630* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2631
2632Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2633--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2634When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2635so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2636
f6d3257b
GM
2637** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2638to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2639
2640Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2641text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2642is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2643your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2644laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2645just display it black instead.
2646
2647This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2648a line like
2649
2650 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2651
2652in your `.emacs'.
2653
a933dad1
DL
2654** New face implementation.
2655
2656Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2657font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2658
2659+++
2660*** New faces.
2661
2662Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2663
2664 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2665
a933dad1
DL
2666 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2667 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2668
a933dad1 2669 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2670
a933dad1 2671 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2672
a933dad1 2673 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2674
a933dad1 2675 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2676
a933dad1
DL
2677 7. Background color.
2678
2679 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2680
2681 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2682
2683 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2684
2685 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2686
2687 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2688 color.
2689
2690 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2691 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2692
2693Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2694same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2695frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2696faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2697with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2698attributes mentioned above.
2699
2700There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2701definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2702created frames.
79214ddf 2703
a933dad1
DL
2704A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2705have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2706`fully-specified'.
2707
2708+++
2709*** Face merging.
2710
2711The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2712combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2713aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2714properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2715that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2716results in a fully-specified face.
2717
2718+++
2719*** Face realization.
2720
2721After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2722merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2723realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2724available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2725face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2726cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2727
2728Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2729character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2730for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2731charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2732
2733Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2734specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2735being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2736the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2737statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2738
2739In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2740`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
27410x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2742the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2743initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2744Emacs.
2745
2746Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2747`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2748registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2749with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2750
2751++++
2752**** Clearing face caches.
2753
2754The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2755on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2756unused fonts.
2757
2758+++
2759*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2760
a933dad1
DL
2761Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2762given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2763for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2764
2765If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2766pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2767family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2768property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2769an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2770
2771Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2772against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2773match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2774
2775Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2776
2777The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2778attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2779face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2780names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2781that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2782width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2783to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2784
2785Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2786specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2787face doesn't exist.
2788
2789+++
2790**** Scalable fonts
2791
2792Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2793since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2794servers.
2795
2796To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2797`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2798scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2799Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2800scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2801that list. Example:
2802
2803 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2804
2805allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2806
2807+++
2808*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2809
2810- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2811
2812Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2813is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2814string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2815
2816If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2817the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2818FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2819POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2820SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2821These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2822if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2823REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2824the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2825of the face font sort order.
2826
79214ddf 2827- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2828
2829Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2830omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2831(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2832non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2833
2834- Variable: font-list-limit
2835
2836Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2837won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2838matching font. The default is currently 100.
2839
2840+++
2841*** Setting face attributes.
2842
2843For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2844with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2845implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2846`face-attribute'.
2847
2848Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2849symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2850
2851The following attributes are recognized:
2852
2853`:family'
2854
2855VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2856or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2857and `?' are allowed.
2858
2859`:width'
2860
2861VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2862It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2863`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2864`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2865
2866`:height'
2867
787345ff
MB
2868VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2869in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2870scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2871height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2872
2873`:weight'
2874
2875VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2876symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2877`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2878
2879`:slant'
2880
2881VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2882symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2883`reverse-oblique'.
2884
2885`:foreground', `:background'
2886
2887VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2888
2889`:underline'
2890
2891VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2892VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2893a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2894don't underline.
2895
2896`:overline'
2897
2898VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2899VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2900string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2901overline.
2902
2903`:strike-through'
2904
2905VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2906striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2907face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2908is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2909
2910`:box'
2911
2912VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2913around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2914VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2915of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2916and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2917VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2918:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2919the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2920specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2921defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2922the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2923color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2924should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2925like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2926that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2927the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2928box.
2929
2930`:inverse-video'
2931
2932VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2933inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2934
2935`:stipple'
2936
2937If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2938The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2939searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2940HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2941is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2942explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2943
2944For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2945and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2946
2947`:font'
2948
2949Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2950XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2951is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2952versions of Emacs.
2953
2954For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2955be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2956must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2957
2958Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2959`defface'.
2960
787345ff
MB
2961`:inherit'
2962
2963VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2964of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2965like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2966
a933dad1
DL
2967*** Face attributes and X resources
2968
2969The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2970from X resources:
2971
2972 Face attribute X resource class
2973-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2974 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2975 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2976 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2977 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2978 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2979 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2980 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2981 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2982 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2983 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2984 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2985 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2986 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2987 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2988 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2989 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2990 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2991 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2992 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2993
2994+++
2995*** Text property `face'.
2996
2997The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2998specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2999specification can be
3000
30011. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3002
30032. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3004 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3005 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3006 for face attribute names.
3007
30083. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3009 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3010 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3011
3012+++
3013** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3014
acf3ecb7
EZ
3015The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3016on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3017the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3018default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3019`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3020used to clear the mapping table.
3021
acf3ecb7
EZ
3022** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3023
3024The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3025and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3026type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3027color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3028display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3029old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3030`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3031compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3032should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3033modify their color-related behavior.
3034
3035The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3036any frame type.
3037
8a5719f0
EZ
3038** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3039
3040The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3041`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3042`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3043`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3044`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3045`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3046display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3047the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3048platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3049
a933dad1
DL
3050+++
3051** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3052
463cac2d 3053This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3054
3055The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3056end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3057Otherwise, it returns zero.
3058
463cac2d
GM
3059** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3060
3061There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3062buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3063property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3064
9a9dfda8 3065Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3066forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3067to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3068not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3069commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3070boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3071`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3072functions.
463cac2d
GM
3073
3074Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3075a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3076editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3077
9a9dfda8
GM
3078The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3079
59927f88 3080- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3081
3082Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3083
9a9dfda8
GM
3084A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3085If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3086constrained position if that is is different.
3087
3088If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3089positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3090ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3091constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3092as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3093is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3094fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3095the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3096also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3097
3098If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3099NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3100unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3101C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3102only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3103
59927f88
MB
3104If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3105a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3106
3107Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3108
3109- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3110
59927f88 3111Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3112A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3113If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3114
3115- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3116
3117Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3118A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3119If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3120If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3121field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3122
3123- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3124
3125Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3126A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3127If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3128If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3129then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3130
3131- Function: field-string &optional POS
3132
3133Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3134A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3135If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3136
3137- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3138
3139Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3140A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3141If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3142
a933dad1
DL
3143+++
3144** Image support.
3145
3146Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3147strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3148(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3149replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3150
3151If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3152`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3153AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3154window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3155area.
3156
3157IMAGE is an image specification.
3158
3159*** Image specifications
3160
3161Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3162is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3163specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3164symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3165described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3166
3167The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3168
3169`:ascent ASCENT'
3170
576da55d
GM
3171ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3172If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3173to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3174
3175If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3176image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3177
5d94f558 3178If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3179centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3180of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3181overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3182
3183`:margin MARGIN'
3184
79214ddf 3185MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3186margin around the image. Default is 0.
3187
3188`:relief RELIEF'
3189
3190RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3191around an image.
3192
3193`:algorithm ALGO'
3194
47e351a3
GM
3195Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3196
3197ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3198edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3199
3200ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3201apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3202nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3203position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3204around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3205neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3206transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3207x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3208below.
3209
3210 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3211 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3212 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3213
3214The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3215resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3216multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3217of the factors' absolute values.
3218
327652be 3219Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3220
47e351a3
GM
3221 (1 0 0
3222 0 0 0
3223 9 9 -1)
3224
3225Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3226
3227 ( 2 -1 0
3228 -1 0 1
3229 0 1 -2)
3230
ba9eeda1
GM
3231ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3232``disabled''.
3233
47e351a3
GM
3234`:mask MASK'
3235
3236If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3237the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3238image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3239background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3240image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3241the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3242GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3243image.
a933dad1 3244
47e351a3
GM
3245If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3246in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3247`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3248
3249`:file FILE'
3250
3251Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3252search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3253building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3254may be present in the image specification.
3255
518df5c4
GM
3256`:data DATA'
3257
3258Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3259supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3260present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3261support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3262
a933dad1
DL
3263*** Supported image types
3264
b246b1f6 3265**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3266
3267XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3268properties supported are
3269
3270`:foreground FG'
3271
3272FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3273is the frame's foreground.
3274
3275`:background FG'
3276
3277BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3278the frame's background color.
3279
3280XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3281case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3282instead of a `:file' property.
3283
3284`:width WIDTH'
3285
3286WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3287
3288`:height HEIGHT'
3289
3290HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3291
3292`:data DATA'
3293
3294DATA must be either
3295
3296 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3297 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3298
3299 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3300
3301 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3302 bitmap.
3303
c76e04a8
GM
3304 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3305 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3306 in the file.
3307
a933dad1
DL
3308**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3309
3310XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3311`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3312found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3313`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3314
3315Additional image properties supported are:
3316
3317`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3318
3319SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3320name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3321name.
3322
3323XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3324add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3325
a933dad1
DL
3326The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3327to display compressed images.
3328
3329**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3330
3331PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3332mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3333defined.
3334
3335**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3336
3337Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3338package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3339are:
3340
a933dad1
DL
3341**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3342
3343Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3344package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3345properties defined.
3346
3347**** GIF, image type `gif'
3348
3349Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3350`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3351
3352Additional image properties supported are:
3353
3354`:index INDEX'
3355
3356INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3357multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3358
3359This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3360For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3361at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3362every 0.1 seconds.
3363
3364(defun show-anim (file max)
3365 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3366 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3367
3368(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3369 (when (= idx max)
3370 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3371 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3372 (save-excursion
3373 (set-buffer buffer)
3374 (goto-char (point-min))
3375 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3376 (insert-image img "x"))
3377 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3378
3379**** PNG, image type `png'
3380
3381Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3382package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3383properties defined.
3384
3385**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3386
3387Additional image properties supported are:
3388
3389`:pt-width WIDTH'
3390
3391WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3392integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3393
3394`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3395
3396HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3397must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3398
3399`:bounding-box BOX'
3400
3401BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3402the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3403files. This is an required property.
3404
3405Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3406lisp/gs.el.
3407
3408*** Lisp interface.
3409
79214ddf
FP
3410The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3411which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3412
3413Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3414they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3415The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3416manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3417images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3418
3419*** Simplified image API, image.el
3420
3421The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3422creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3423can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3424define an image based on available image types. The functions
3425`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3426buffer.
3427
3428+++
3429** Display margins.
3430
3431Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3432and images.
3433
3434To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3435`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3436`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3437obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3438`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3439the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3440of the display margins.
3441
3442You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3443containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3444one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3445string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3446in this file).
3447
3448+++
3449** Help display
3450
3451Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3452moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3453`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3454that have a `help-echo' property.
3455
9662da0b 3456If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3457is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3458the window in which the help was found.
3459
3460If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3461`help-echo' text property was found.
3462
3463If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3464POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3465
3466If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3467the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3468mouse.
d5aa31d8 3469
9662da0b
GM
3470If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3471string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3472
3473For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3474determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3475property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3476For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3477used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3478
3479The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3480the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3481causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3482
3483+++
3484** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3485
3486The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3487This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3488
3489The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3490scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3491The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3492scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3493used.
3494
79214ddf
FP
3495 (global-set-key [A-down]
3496 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3497 (interactive)
79214ddf 3498 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3499 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3500 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3501 #'(lambda ()
3502 (interactive)
79214ddf 3503 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3504 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3505
3506+++
3507** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3508
3509Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3510when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3511variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3512is called with one argument, POS.
3513
3514At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3515characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3516as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3517property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3518`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3519
3520+++
3521** Tool bar support.
3522
3523Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3524parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3525controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3526suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3527`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3528automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3529
3530*** Tool bar item definitions
3531
3532Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3533`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3534where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3535
a933dad1
DL
3536CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3537evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3538the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3539property (see below).
79214ddf 3540
a933dad1
DL
3541BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3542binding are currently ignored.
3543
3544The following properties are recognized:
3545
3546`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3547
a933dad1
DL
3548FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3549or disabled.
79214ddf 3550
a933dad1 3551`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3552
a933dad1 3553FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3554
a933dad1
DL
3555`:filter FUNCTION'
3556
3557FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3558FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3559used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3560
a933dad1
DL
3561`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3562
3563TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3564and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3565
a933dad1
DL
3566`:image IMAGES'
3567
3568IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3569image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3570meaning of each of the four elements:
3571
3572 Index Use when item is
3573 ----------------------------------------
3574 0 enabled and selected
3575 1 enabled and deselected
3576 2 disabled and selected
3577 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3578
4ba7246d
GM
3579If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3580algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3581
a933dad1 3582`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3583
a933dad1
DL
3584Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3585is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3586
dab96841 3587The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3588toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3589to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3590menu bar.
dab96841 3591
a933dad1
DL
3592*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3593
3594If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3595resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3596than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3597
79214ddf 3598If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3599raised when the mouse moves over them.
3600
3601You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3602`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3603pixels. Default is 1.
3604
3605You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3606`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3607
3608*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3609
3610You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3611a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3612
3613 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3614 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3615 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3616
3617is the original tool bar item definition, then
3618
3619 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3620
3621makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3622item.
3623
3624** Mode line changes.
3625
3626+++
3627*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3628
3629The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3630that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3631a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3632
36331. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3634a `local-map' text property.
3635
36362. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3637that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3638
36393. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3640is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3641`local-map' property.
3642
3643The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3644properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3645example.
3646
54522c9f
GM
3647*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3648evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3649
a933dad1
DL
3650+++
3651*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3652variable mode-line-format to nil.
3653
3654+++
3655*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3656
3657This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3658`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3659completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3660`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3661line.
3662
3663The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3664`header-line'.
3665
3666The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3667position in the header-line.
3668
3669+++
3670** Text property `display'
3671
623a0aae
GM
3672The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3673replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3674also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3675the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3676below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3677
623a0aae
GM
3678*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3679
3680To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3681text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3682
3683If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3684marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3685the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3686is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3687simpler form STRING as property value.
3688
a933dad1
DL
3689*** Variable width and height spaces
3690
3691To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3692specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3693`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3694area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3695marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3696displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3697simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3698
3699The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3700PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3701properties described below.
3702
3703The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3704characters having the `display' property.
3705
3706- :width WIDTH
3707
3708Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3709character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3710
3711- :relative-width FACTOR
3712
3713Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3714first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3715same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3716width of that character by FACTOR.
3717
3718- :align-to HPOS
3719
3720Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3721value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3722
3723Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3724
3725- :height HEIGHT
3726
3727Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3728normal line height.
3729
3730- :relative-height FACTOR
3731
3732The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3733of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3734
3735- :ascent ASCENT
3736
3737Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3738used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3739baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3740equal to 100.
3741
3742You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3743
3744*** Images
3745
3746A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3747. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3748in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3749their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3750the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3751`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3752area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3753the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3754as display specification.
3755
3756*** Other display properties
3757
3758- :space-width FACTOR
3759
3760Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3761should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3762integer or float.
3763
3764- :height HEIGHT
3765
3766Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3767
3768If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3769means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3770the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3771``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3772a font is available counts as a step.
3773
3774If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3775as tall as the frame's default font.
3776
3777If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3778height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3779
3780Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3781`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3782
3783- :raise FACTOR
3784
3785FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3786font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3787raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3788amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3789`:height' subproperty.
3790
3791*** Conditional display properties
3792
3793All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3794has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3795applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3796During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3797the text having the `display' property.
3798
3799The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3800`(:when t SPEC)'.
3801
3802+++
3803** New menu separator types.
3804
3805Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3806item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3807treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3808to specify other menu separator types.
3809
3810- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3811
3812No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3813separator occurs.
3814
3815- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3816
3817A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3818
3819- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3820
3821A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3822
3823- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3824
3825A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3826
3827- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3828
3829A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3830
3831- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3832
3833A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3834displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3835
3836- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3837
3838A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3839
3840- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3841
3842A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3843
3844- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3845
3846A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3847
3848- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3849
3850Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3851
3852- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3853
3854Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3855
3856- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3857
3858Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3859
3860- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3861
3862Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3863
3864Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3865the corresponding single-line separators.
3866
3867+++
3868** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3869
3870The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3871`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3872Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3873that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3874default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3875default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3876default foreground is black.
3877
3878The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3879(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3880`ScrollBarBackground').
3881
3882Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3883settings for scroll bar colors.
3884
3885+++
3886** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3887display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3888
3889---
3890** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3891starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3892on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3893line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3894the original window start.
3895
3896---
3897** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3898`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3899now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3900
3901+++
3902** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3903
3904A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3905`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3906windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3907other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3908
3909The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3910fixed-width and fixed-height.
3911
3912 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3913
3914A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3915fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3916window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3917change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3918temporarily to nil, for example
3919
3920 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3921 (enlarge-window 10))
3922
79214ddf 3923Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3924or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3925
3926** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3927terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3928to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3929overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3930horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3931support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3932
3787e12e
GM
3933
3934^L
3935* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3936
3937** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3938input.
3939
3940** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3941
3942** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3943
3944** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3945only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3946exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3947(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3948(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3949
3950** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3951been added.
3952
3953^L
3954* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3955
3956** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3957
3958^L
3959* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3960
3961** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3962M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3963\f
3964* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3965
3966** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3967
3968You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3969Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3970`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3971
3972If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3973is the one that is used.
3974
3975** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3976the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3977Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3978separate from the command's regular output.
3979Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3980says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3981In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3982the buffer name.
3983
3984When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3985output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3986it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3987cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3988
3989** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3990the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3991is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3992created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3993
3994** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3995example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3996match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3997quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3998
3999** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4000now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4001if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4002they never ignore case.
4003
4004** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4005under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4006applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4007of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4008just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4009convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4010part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4011
4012If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4013the same format that was used in the file before.
4014
4015You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4016`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4017
4018** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4019renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4020This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4021
4022** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4023The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4024buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4025your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4026is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4027end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4028Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4029
4030The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4031eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4032control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4033format. You can now customize these variables.
4034
4035** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4036filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4037filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4038enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4039
4040** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4041in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4042windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4043
4044** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4045dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4046doesn't have any effect.
4047
4048** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4049not one per buffer.
4050
4051** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4052use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4053 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4054
4055** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4056To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4057`auto-show-mode' command.
4058
4059** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4060avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4061versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4062choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4063occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4064
4065** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4066cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4067
4068** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4069character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4070feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4071
4072** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4073the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4074interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4075and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4076
4077** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4078
4079The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4080that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4081one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4082codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4083set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4084
4085Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4086from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4087
4088IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4089equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4090a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4091`?' on other systems.
4092
4093IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4094feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4095Unix.
4096
4097Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4098current codepage when it starts.
4099
4100** Mail changes
4101
4102*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4103`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4104appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4105non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4106MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4107headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4108latin-1:
4109
4110 MIME-version: 1.0
4111 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4112 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4113
4114*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4115default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4116default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4117sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4118buffer-file-coding-system.
4119
4120You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4121sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4122mail.
4123
4124*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4125if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4126Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4127list of possible coding systems.
4128
4129** CC Mode changes
4130
4131*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4132modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4133longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4134docstring for details.
4135
4136*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4137symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4138found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4139prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4140lineup functions use this feature currently.
4141
4142*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4143"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4144
4145*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4146"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4147
4148*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4149from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4150symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4151c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4152anonymous classes.
4153
4154*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4155syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4156
4157*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4158inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4159support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4160function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4161
4162*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4163(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4164brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4165c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4166(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4167
4168*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4169
4170*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4171
4172*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4173for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4174
4175*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4176
4177*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4178associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4179This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4180circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4181class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4182
4183** Gnus changes.
4184
4185*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4186added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4187Gnus manual for the full story.
4188
4189*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4190before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4191group, which is created automatically.
4192
4193*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4194values.
4195
4196*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4197
4198*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4199outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4200
4201*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4202`C-u C-c C-c'.
4203
4204*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4205
4206*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4207re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4208
4209*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4210
4211*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4212Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4213
4214*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4215`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4216
4217*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4218control over simplification.
4219
4220*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4221
4222*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4223limit.
4224
4225*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4226
4227*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4228
4229*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4230If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4231rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4232
4233*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4234`a' forces normal posting method.
4235
4236*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4237-- `W d'.
4238
4239*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4240to a non-nil value.
4241
4242*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4243where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4244
4245*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4246has been added.
4247
4248*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4249
4250*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4251
4252*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4253`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4254
4255*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4256`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4257
4258*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4259
4260*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4261been added.
4262
4263*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4264`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4265
4266*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4267updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4268
4269*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4270
4271*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4272
4273*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4274
4275** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4276
4277*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4278options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4279nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4280
4281*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4282TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4283of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4284TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4285can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4286
4287*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4288All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4289but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4290the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4291
4292*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4293the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4294buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4295mismatch.
4296
4297** Changes to RefTeX mode
4298
4299*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4300file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4301
4302*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4303lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4304characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4305removed from the label.
4306
4307*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4308a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4309
4310*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4311customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4312
4313*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4314`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4315expressions.
4316
4317*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4318
4319** New/deleted modes and packages
4320
4321*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4322SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4323
4324*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4325editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4326SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4327
4328*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4329changes with a special face.
4330
4331*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4332this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4333Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4334\f
4335* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4336
4337** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4338This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4339conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4340and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4341check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4342
4343The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4344Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4345distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4346
4347** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4348MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4349controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4350directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4351Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4352on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4353string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4354program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4355printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4356
4357** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4358output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4359available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4360input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4361temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4362program.
4363
4364An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4365and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4366programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4367automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4368as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4369ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4370
4371** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4372a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4373MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4374was not documented clearly before.
4375
4376** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4377This includes Tetris and Snake.
4378\f
4379* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4380
4381** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4382return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4383They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4384meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4385
4386** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4387WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4388and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4389
4390** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4391
4392*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4393It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4394
4395*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4396the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4397integers.
4398
4399** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4400files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4401arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4402file names and attributes are returned.
4403
4404** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4405sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4406accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4407It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4408returns the result.
4409
4410** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4411to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4412
4413** New functions for base64 conversion:
4414
4415The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4416into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4417performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4418optionally.
4419
4420Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4421job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4422
4423**
4424The new function process-running-child-p
4425will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4426terminal to its own child process.
4427
4428** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4429when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4430to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4431itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4432
4433** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4434be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4435
4436** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4437:included is an alias for :visible.
4438
4439easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4440easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4441to move or copy menu entries.
4442
4443** Multibyte editing changes
4444
4445*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4446an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4447make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4448work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4449char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4450 (setq char (sref str idx)
4451 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4452The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4453
4454If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4455(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4456 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4457
4458*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4459region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4460deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4461
4462 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4463
4464This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4465across the boundary.
4466
4467*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4468`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4469 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4470 contains 8-bit characters.
4471 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4472 contains invalid characters.
4473
4474*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4475text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4476preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4477text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4478way.
4479
4480*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4481If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4482end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4483prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4484
4485*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4486compose Thai characters in a string.
4487
4488** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4489argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4490for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4491menus should always use the third argument.
4492
4493** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4494read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4495arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4496input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4497
4498** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4499of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4500programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4501inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4502
4503** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4504the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4505returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4506echo area contents.
4507
4508 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4509
4510** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4511NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4512requested feature cannot be loaded.
4513
4514** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4515foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4516means to clear out that attribute.
4517
4518** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4519gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4520
4521** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4522read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4523unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4524end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4525
4526** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4527the gap of the current buffer.
4528
4529** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4530to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4531current buffer.
4532
4533** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4534facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4535These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4536it back in after any modifications have been made.
4537\f
4538* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4539
4540** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4541the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4542/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4543directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4544subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4545
4546Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4547names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4548Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4549which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4550these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4551
4552Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4553starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4554time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4555
4556This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4557Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4558to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4559subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4560`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4561results.
4562
4563** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4564GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4565that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4566fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4567\f
4568* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4569
4570** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4571including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4572it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4573perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4574
4575** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4576specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4577region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4578further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4579command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4580within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4581are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4582region.
4583
4584In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4585selective undo.
4586
4587** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4588unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4589buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4590effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4591Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4592
4593The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4594though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4595-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4596load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4597
4598** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4599no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4600enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4601something that most users not do.
4602
4603** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4604operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4605The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4606applications.
4607
4608C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4609pasting operations.
4610
4611** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4612setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4613like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4614printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4615`ps-printer-name'.
4616
4617** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4618minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4619any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4620except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4621incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4622hits a new word.
4623
4624Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4625Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4626to be confused by TeX commands.
4627
4628You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4629correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4630clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4631of various alternative replacements and actions.
4632
4633Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4634the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4635corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4636alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4637flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4638
4639Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4640flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4641
4642** Changes in input method usage.
4643
4644Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4645the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4646respectively.
4647
4648You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4649
4650If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4651of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4652
4653The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4654that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4655
4656 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4657
4658 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4659
4660 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4661 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4662
4663 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4664 given in the following case:
4665 o When you are using a complex input method.
4666 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4667
4668If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4669input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4670and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4671setting it to t is helpful.
4672
4673The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4674
4675In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4676keys:
4677 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4678 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4679 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4680These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4681environment.
4682
4683** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4684names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4685minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4686get
4687
4688 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4689
4690which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4691
4692Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4693Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4694
4695** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4696at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4697its owner and group.
4698
4699** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4700Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4701
4702** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4703contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4704
4705** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4706which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4707in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4708by the left edge of the rectangle.
4709
4710** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4711increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4712C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4713for writing keyboard macros.
4714
4715** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4716files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4717frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4718the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4719additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4720info.
4721
4722** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4723
4724** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4725query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4726contents only.
4727
4728** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4729confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4730the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4731says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4732
4733** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4734non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4735literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4736
4737** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4738now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4739Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4740inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4741
4742** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4743failure if the command produces no output.
4744
4745** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4746manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4747the mouse.
4748
4749** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4750mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4751function and variable names.
4752
4753** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4754reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4755file-coding-system-alist.
4756
4757** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4758t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4759converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4760the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4761according to the current fontset.
4762
4763** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4764
4765The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4766that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4767nonascii-insert-offset.
4768
4769For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4770enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4771nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4772characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4773
4774** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4775an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4776
4777** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4778letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4779
4780** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4781are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4782command keys.
4783
4784** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4785user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4786
4787Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4788user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4789all variables that have documentation.
4790
4791** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4792shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4793that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4794minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4795it should show; the default is 20.
4796
4797Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4798the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4799of your input.
4800
4801** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4802all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4803recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4804argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4805the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4806Newly added options are included as well.
4807
4808If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4809then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4810for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4811
4812This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4813Customize menu.
4814
4815** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4816the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4817
4818** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4819buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4820invoked.
4821
4822** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4823that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4824The default is 1.
4825
4826** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4827syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4828new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4829(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4830sensibly.
4831
4832** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4833
4834** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4835value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4836two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4837
4838** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4839reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4840for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4841every night.
4842
4843** Desktop changes
4844
4845*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4846the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4847
4848*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4849and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4850
4851** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4852read and post multi-lingual articles.
4853
4854** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4855doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4856be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4857outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4858the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4859made invisible again.
4860
4861** Mail reading and sending changes
4862
4863*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4864the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4865changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4866toggle.
4867
4868*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4869now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4870summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4871the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4872rmail-default-body-file.
4873
4874*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4875longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4876handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4877
4878*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4879it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4880is evaluated to insert the signature.
4881
4882*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4883outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4884handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4885putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4886transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4887especially interested in trying feedmail.
4888
4889feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4890feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4891provided by feedmail are:
4892
4893**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4894stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4895there is also a queue for draft messages
4896
4897**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4898be prompted for confirmation
4899
4900**** does smart filling of address headers
4901
4902**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4903the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4904can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4905
4906**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4907the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4908/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4909function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4910
4911** Dired changes
4912
4913*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4914files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4915
4916*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4917run Dired on the directory name at point.
4918
4919*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4920files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4921for a specified regexp.
4922
4923** VC Changes
4924
4925*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4926conveniently.
4927
4928*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4929faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4930Dired.
4931
4932VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4933directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4934listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4935currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4936
4937You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4938then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4939vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4940control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4941on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4942
4943All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4944is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4945`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4946the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4947`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4948
4949The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4950toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4951VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4952`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4953
4954Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4955ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4956command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4957
4958*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4959file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4960session to resolve them.
4961
4962Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4963resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4964contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4965uses as well).
4966
4967*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4968command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4969you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4970either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4971branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4972If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4973using ediff.
4974
4975** Changes in Font Lock
4976
4977*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4978are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4979use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4980unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4981compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4982
4983** Frame name display changes
4984
4985*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4986frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4987raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4988when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4989
4990*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4991frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4992menu.
4993
4994** Comint (subshell) changes
4995
4996*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4997subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4998with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4999
5000*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5001
5002C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5003that is, the line after the last line you got.
5004You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5005
5006C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5007send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5008the following line.
5009
5010C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5011which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5012previously sent input.
5013
5014C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5015it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5016as the search string.
5017
5018*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5019automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5020
5021** C mode changes
5022
5023*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5024and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5025assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5026definition.
5027
5028*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5029(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5030Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5031style is still the default however.
5032
5033*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5034
5035*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5036are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5037them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5038
5039*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5040and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5041
5042*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5043namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5044
5045*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5046makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5047
5048*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5049c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5050
5051*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5052should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5053package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5054variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5055
5056** Changes to hippie-expand.
5057
5058*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5059non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5060which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5061
5062*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5063non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5064expanding dynamically.
5065
5066*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5067non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5068
5069*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5070non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5071this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5072expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5073
5074*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5075
5076** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5077
5078*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5079bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5080automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5081bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5082against the first word in the title.
5083
5084*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5085capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5086bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5087lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5088lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5089bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5090
5091*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5092generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5093replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5094bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5095
5096** Changes in vcursor.el.
5097
5098*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5099and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5100variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5101entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5102`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5103in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5104
5105*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5106Editing group once the package is loaded.
5107
5108*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5109generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5110vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5111
5112*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5113vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5114
5115** Ispell changes.
5116
5117*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5118buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5119are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5120
5121*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5122A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5123and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5124defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5125include:
5126
5127 o URLs are automatically skipped
5128 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5129
5130*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5131
5132** Changes to RefTeX mode
5133
5134RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5135large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5136re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5137section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5138
5139*** New recursive parser.
5140
5141The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5142entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5143recursive parser scans the individual files.
5144
5145*** Parsing only part of a document.
5146
5147Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5148partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5149the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5150
5151 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5152
5153*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5154
5155This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5156
5157 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5158
5159*** Using multiple selection buffers
5160
5161If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5162for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5163
5164 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5165
5166*** References to external documents.
5167
5168The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5169documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5170documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5171macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5172RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5173the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5174The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5175
5176*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5177
5178The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5179and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5180
5181Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5182the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5183
5184*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5185
5186The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5187buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5188
5189*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5190
5191The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5192contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5193`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5194have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5195enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5196at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5197more.
5198
5199*** Support for the varioref package
5200
5201The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5202
5203*** New hooks
5204
5205Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5206and citations are created. These hooks are
5207`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5208`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5209
5210*** Citations outside LaTeX
5211
5212The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5213a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5214
5215*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5216
5217The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5218fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5219fontified, use
5220
5221 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5222
5223** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5224With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5225the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5226directories that contain the same file name.
5227
5228Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5229Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5230file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5231Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5232have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5233names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5234directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5235directory.
5236
5237** New modes and packages
5238
5239*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5240It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5241it, but some do not.
5242
5243*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5244code.
5245
5246*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5247current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5248around in a buffer.
5249
5250Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5251
5252*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5253uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5254be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5255established system of notation similar to Chess.
5256
5257*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5258documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5259guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5260
5261*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5262available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5263system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5264simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5265functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5266the like.
5267
5268*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5269identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5270
5271*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5272within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5273used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5274the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5275
5276*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5277
5278 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5279 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5280 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5281 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5282 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5283 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5284 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5285 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5286 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5287 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5288 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5289
5290 Platform-specific modes:
5291
5292 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5293 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5294 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5295 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5296 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5297 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5298 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5299 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5300 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5301\f
5302* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5303
5304** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5305use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5306That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5307Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5308
5309Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5310you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5311consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5312
5313** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5314and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5315specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5316searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5317
5318** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5319multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5320character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5321environment.
5322
5323** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5324take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5325string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5326current input method for reading this one event.
5327
5328** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5329now control whether to output certain characters as
5330backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5331non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5332characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5333in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5334\f
5335* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5336
5337** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5338of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5339
5340** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5341in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5342always increases point by 1.
5343
5344The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5345considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5346
5347See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5348
5349** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5350Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5351default value changed. For example,
5352
5353 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5354 :type 'integer
5355 :group 'foo
5356 :version "20.3")
5357
5358 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5359 :version "20.3")
5360
5361If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5362default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5363is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5364`:version' in the top level group.
5365
5366This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5367
5368** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5369starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5370
5371However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5372symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5373support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5374to themselves.
5375
5376If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5377this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5378values whatever.
5379
5380** There is a new debugger command, R.
5381It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5382in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5383
5384** Frame-local variables.
5385
5386You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5387the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5388local bindings for that variable.
5389
5390These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5391frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5392modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5393parameter name.
5394
5395Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5396Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5397active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5398that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5399
5400It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5401clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5402very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5403through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5404
5405** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5406"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5407evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5408makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5409See the documentation in sregex.el.
5410
5411** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5412is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5413parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5414The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5415
5416** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5417If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5418
5419** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5420known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5421define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5422
5423** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5424when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5425it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5426history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5427
5428The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5429return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5430empty input.
5431
5432** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5433for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5434`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5435Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5436`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5437
5438** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5439echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5440a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5441default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5442
5443** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5444specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5445function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5446place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5447non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5448
5449** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5450If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5451up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5452end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5453
5454** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5455which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5456If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5457
5458** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5459holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5460was directed to display this buffer.
5461
5462** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5463with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5464describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5465other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5466set-window-configuration.
5467
5468** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5469window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5470positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5471windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5472
5473** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5474override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5475look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5476
5477If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5478non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5479map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5480
5481minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5482and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5483
5484** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5485except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5486
5487** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5488USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5489floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5490
5491** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5492to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5493in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5494it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5495
5496** Menu changes
5497
5498*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5499keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5500better supported.
5501
5502The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5503a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5504you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5505can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5506then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5507
5508*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5509
5510In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5511 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5512defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5513starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5514
5515The format is:
5516 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5517 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5518where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5519string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5520The supported properties include
5521
5522:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5523 item is enabled.
5524:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5525 item should appear in the menu.
5526:filter FILTER-FN
5527 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5528 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5529 It should return a binding to use instead.
5530:keys DESCRIPTION
5531 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5532 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5533 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5534:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5535 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5536 keyboard binding.
5537:key-sequence nil
5538 This means that the command normally has no
5539 keyboard equivalent.
5540:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5541:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5542 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5543 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5544 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5545
5546Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5547Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5548
5549(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5550
5551** New event types
5552
5553*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5554mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5555corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5556which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5557
5558 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5559
5560where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5561same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5562indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5563negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5564the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5565forward, away from the user.
5566
5567As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5568
5569*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5570files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5571and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5572filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5573loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5574
5575 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5576
5577where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5578same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5579that were dragged and dropped.
5580
5581As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5582
5583** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5584
5585*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5586any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5587to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5588
5589*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5590can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5591that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5592
5593*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5594in Emacs 19 and before.
5595
5596The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5597The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5598
5599*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5600buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5601unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5602representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5603
5604This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5605as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5606viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5607one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5608will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5609
5610This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5611representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5612(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5613consistent with the new representation.
5614
5615*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5616representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5617about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5618however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5619
5620The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5621nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5622using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5623
5624*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5625representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5626representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5627
5628The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5629loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5630is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5631
5632*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5633which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5634
5635*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5636which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5637
5638*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5639portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5640so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5641You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5642
5643*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5644it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5645
5646*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5647convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5648buffer or string being searched.
5649
5650One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5651[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5652searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5653searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5654obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5655you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5656expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5657
5658*** Structure of coding system changed.
5659
5660All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5661by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5662which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5663as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5664vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5665your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5666define-coding-system-alias.
5667
5668The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5669the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5670access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5671pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5672character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5673safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5674'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5675`iso-8859-1'.
5676
5677Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5678The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5679coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5680(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5681
5682Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5683also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5684are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5685the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5686
5687*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5688proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5689This function requires a user interaction.
5690
5691*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5692find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5693select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5694systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5695a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5696select-safe-coding-system.
5697
5698*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5699decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5700last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5701was done.
5702
5703*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5704used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5705coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5706
5707*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5708return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5709characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5710`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5711
5712*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5713coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5714coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5715converted.
5716
5717*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5718coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5719
5720*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5721character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5722character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5723each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5724either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5725range of characters.
5726
5727*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5728Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5729
5730*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5731in the current buffer at position POS.
5732
5733*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5734input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5735function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5736character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5737event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5738binding input-method-function to nil.
5739
5740The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5741method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5742input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5743the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5744not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5745
5746The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5747subsequent events of a key sequence.
5748
5749*** You can customize any language environment by using
5750set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5751
5752The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5753customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5754instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5755environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5756exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5757\f
5758* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5759
5760** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5761options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5762at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5763tree structure.
5764
5765M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5766user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5767
5768With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5769session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5770in your .emacs file.)
5771
5772** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5773You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5774
5775** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5776This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5777
5778** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5779immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5780kills the region.
5781
5782The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5783delete the character before point, as usual.
5784
5785** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5786on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5787by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5788
5789** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5790insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5791the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5792onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5793history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5794past.)
5795
5796** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5797This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5798in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5799TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5800makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5801
5802As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5803and is an alias for it.
5804
5805If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5806use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5807
5808** Scrolling changes
5809
5810*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5811position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5812
5813In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5814on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5815where it started.
5816
5817*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5818move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5819screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5820does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5821
5822*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5823top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5824comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5825recenters the window.
5826
5827** International character set support (MULE)
5828
5829Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5830including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5831Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5832Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5833features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5834MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5835
5836Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5837coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5838character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5839variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5840into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5841
5842Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5843generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5844supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5845language, to make it possible to type them.
5846
5847The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5848character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5849
5850The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5851to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5852
5853You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5854
5855 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5856
5857Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5858characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5859argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5860already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5861characters for their work until they want to change.
5862
5863*** Input methods
5864
5865An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5866specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5867has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5868the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5869support several input methods.
5870
5871The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5872another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5873work.
5874
5875A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5876characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5877composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5878consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5879sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5880letter.
5881
5882The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5883by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5884First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5885marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5886mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5887
5888None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5889they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5890phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5891converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5892
5893Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5894word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5895typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5896the first guess is wrong.
5897
5898*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5899turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5900
5901If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5902byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5903they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5904the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5905
5906However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5907use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5908includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5909translate automatically to and from either one.
5910
5911*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5912
5913Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5914file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5915sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5916what you want.
5917
5918If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5919example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5920system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5921multibyte characters in that buffer.
5922
5923If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5924character conversion as well.
5925
5926*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5927
5928A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5929Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5930requires using many fonts.
5931
5932Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5933collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5934
5935A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5936the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5937have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5938you would use a font.
5939
5940If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5941specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5942display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5943
5944The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5945(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5946characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5947or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5948and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5949
5950*** Defining fontsets.
5951
5952Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5953chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5954with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5955
5956Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5957of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5958`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5959standard fontset are created automatically.
5960
5961If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5962argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5963FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5964with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5965name is `fontset-startup'.
5966
5967Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5968The resource value should have this form:
5969 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5970FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5971 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5972 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5973 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5974The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5975of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5976CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5977FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5978
5979Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5980last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5981You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5982
5983For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5984font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5985following resource,
5986 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5987the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5988 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5989Here is the substitution rule:
5990 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5991 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5992 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5993 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5994 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5995
5996The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5997fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5998that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5999
6000With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6001like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6002name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6003fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6004fontsets.
6005
6006*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6007defaults for a particular choice of language.
6008
6009Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6010method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6011visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6012already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6013language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6014system for new files that you create.
6015
6016It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6017set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6018whole Emacs session.
6019
6020For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6021chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6022with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6023
6024*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6025specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6026specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6027the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6028coding systems that Emacs supports.
6029
6030*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6031lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6032This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6033After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6034is used for *the immediately following command*.
6035
6036So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6037write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6038
6039If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6040then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6041
6042For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6043visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6044
6045*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6046construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6047to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6048specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6049of the file.
6050
6051*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6052the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6053code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6054translated into that character code.
6055
6056This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6057various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6058
6059By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6060
6061*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6062the coding system for keyboard input.
6063
6064Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6065with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6066some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6067
6068By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6069
6070Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6071input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6072translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6073to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6074designed to work with terminals.
6075
6076*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6077specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6078This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6079has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6080translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6081in the corresponding buffer.
6082
6083By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6084
6085*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6086to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6087It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6088
6089*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6090an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6091command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6092want to use.
6093
6094C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6095method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6096
6097*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6098layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6099remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6100which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6101
6102*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6103the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6104related information.
6105
6106*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6107HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6108scripts.
6109
6110*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6111information about the support for a particular language.
6112You specify the language as an argument.
6113
6114*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6115the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6116first dash.
6117
6118A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6119(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6120whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
61211 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6122
6123 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6124 B big5 (Chinese)
6125 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6126 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6127 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6128 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6129 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6130 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6131 K euc-korea (Korean)
6132 R koi8 (Russian)
6133 Q tibetan
6134 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6135 T lao
6136 T tis620 (Thai)
6137 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6138 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6139 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6140 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6141 z hz (Chinese)
6142
6143When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6144two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6145coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6146keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6147
6148*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6149conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6150
6151When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6152into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6153rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6154Rmail files themselves.
6155
6156*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6157conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6158
6159Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6160for sending mail:
6161
6162- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6163- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6164- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6165 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6166- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6167
6168*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6169to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6170Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6171translations.
6172
6173** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6174of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6175insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6176without any conversion.
6177
6178** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6179You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6180RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6181any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6182
6183** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6184functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6185
6186Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6187Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6188
6189Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6190mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6191
6192** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6193complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6194in the buffer before point.
6195
6196With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6197symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6198you are using.
6199
6200With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6201just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6202
6203** File locking works with NFS now.
6204
6205The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6206in the same directory as FILENAME.
6207
6208This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6209works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6210can become a bottleneck.
6211
6212The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6213does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6214create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6215file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6216rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6217so useful that the change is worth while.
6218
6219When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6220are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6221collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6222tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6223
6224** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6225it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6226show-paren-mode.
6227
6228** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6229selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6230delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6231
6232** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6233within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6234complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6235
6236** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6237it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6238set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6239
6240** Changes in View mode.
6241
6242*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6243Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6244
6245*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6246view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6247
6248*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6249previous state.
6250
6251*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6252scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6253
6254*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6255non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6256not just the selected window.
6257
6258*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6259read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6260turns View mode on or off.
6261
6262*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6263how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6264delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6265
6266** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6267now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6268
6269** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6270has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6271presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6272which version to compare with.
6273
6274** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6275blocks if a match is inside the block.
6276
6277The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6278is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6279isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6280shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6281
6282By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6283of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6284blocks, all of them or none.
6285
6286** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6287current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6288confirmation first.
6289
6290** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6291now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6292However, the mode will not be changed if
6293(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6294(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6295 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6296(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6297
6298This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6299
6300However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6301these commands do not change the major mode.
6302
6303** M-x occur changes.
6304
6305*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6306it performs a case-sensitive search.
6307
6308*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6309if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6310using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6311
6312** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6313in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6314window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6315that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6316buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6317
6318** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6319after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6320appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6321come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6322
6323** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6324selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6325buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6326
6327** Outline mode changes.
6328
6329*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6330
6331*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6332
6333** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6334you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6335Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6336was already active.
6337
6338The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6339unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6340get confused by it.
6341
6342If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6343set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6344
6345** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6346
6347*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6348conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6349character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6350including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6351
6352The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6353mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6354copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6355
6356*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6357are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6358values.
6359
6360`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6361case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6362`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6363case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6364
6365** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6366certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6367can be. The default value is 30.
6368
6369** Changes in Mail mode.
6370
6371*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6372Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6373composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6374`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6375`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6376behavior.
6377
6378C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6379compose-mail-other-frame.
6380
6381*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6382the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6383replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6384buffer that shows the original message.
6385
6386*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6387with separator lines around the contents.
6388
6389*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6390in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6391definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6392need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6393
6394*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6395
6396**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6397for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6398controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6399Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6400
6401**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6402to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6403/etc/passwd.
6404
6405**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6406to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6407/etc/passwd.
6408
6409** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6410special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6411directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6412reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6413
6414Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6415when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6416be taken to be magic.
6417
6418** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6419files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6420available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6421
6422M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6423(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6424
6425** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6426suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6427
6428In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6429
6430new key dired.el binding old key
6431------- ---------------- -------
6432 * c dired-change-marks c
6433 * m dired-mark m
6434 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6435 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6436 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6437 * u dired-unmark u
6438 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6439 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6440 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6441 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6442 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6443 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6444
6445** Rmail changes.
6446
6447*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6448saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6449chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6450each time you run it.
6451
6452*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6453whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6454
6455*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6456messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6457means to move in the opposite direction.
6458
6459*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6460you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6461
6462*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6463just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6464It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6465can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6466for output.
6467
6468** Gnus changes.
6469
6470*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6471
6472*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6473Gnus.
6474
6475*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6476`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6477
6478*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6479article mode line.
6480
6481*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6482
6483*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6484
6485(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6486
6487*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6488are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6489`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6490
6491*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6492
6493*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6494
6495*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6496See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6497
6498*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6499Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6500used to pick articles.
6501
6502*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6503another have been added.
6504
6505 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6506
6507*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6508generating lines in buffers.
6509
6510*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6511`M-C-_'.
6512
6513*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6514
6515*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6516
6517 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6518
6519*** Scores can be decayed.
6520
6521 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6522
6523*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6524Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6525
6526*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6527the native server.
6528
6529 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6530
6531*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6532(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6533
6534*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6535
6536*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6537even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6538
6539*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6540(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6541
6542 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6543 a group.
6544
6545*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6546sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6547
6548 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6549
6550*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6551
6552 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6553
6554*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6555
6556 Use the `Y c' command.
6557
6558*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6559
6560*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6561
6562 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6563
6564*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6565from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6566
6567 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6568
6569*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6570
6571*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6572the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6573
6574 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6575
6576Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6577and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6578from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6579hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6580this issue.)
6581
6582Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6583automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6584particular news group. This can be done by:
6585
6586 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6587
6588Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6589of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6590"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6591system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6592for reading and posting).
6593
6594CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6595 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6596Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6597newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6598there.
6599
6600Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6601default. Here are some of these default settings:
6602
6603 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6604 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6605 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6606 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6607 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6608
6609When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6610the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6611
6612** CC mode changes.
6613
6614*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6615code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6616values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6617this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6618Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6619loaded.
6620
6621If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6622Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6623style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6624share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6625c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6626must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6627
6628*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6629of the current buffer.
6630
6631*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6632it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6633of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6634
6635*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6636style that the Python developers like.
6637
6638*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6639This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6640just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6641
6642** VC Changes [new]
6643
6644** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6645name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6646directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6647
6648This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6649master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6650developers.
6651
6652You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6653RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6654
6655*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6656other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6657writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6658calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6659
6660*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6661version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6662
6663** Calendar changes.
6664
6665A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6666of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6667for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6668
6669** ps-print changes
6670
6671There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6672
6673*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6674
6675The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6676formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6677`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6678`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6679It defaults to `letter'.
6680If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6681
6682The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6683of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6684non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6685
6686The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6687It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6688It defaults to 1.
6689
6690*** Horizontal layout
6691
6692The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6693`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6694All are measured in points.
6695
6696*** Vertical layout
6697
6698The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6699`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6700All are measured in points.
6701
6702*** Headers
6703
6704If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6705`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6706margin above the text.
6707
6708If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6709framing box is printed around the header.
6710
6711The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6712`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6713
6714The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6715`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6716`ps-header-font-size'.
6717
6718*** Font managing
6719
6720The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6721used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6722`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6723elements to this alist.
6724
6725The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6726for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6727
6728** hideshow changes.
6729
6730*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6731C++, ; for lisp).
6732
6733*** Support for java-mode added.
6734
6735*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6736in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6737
6738*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6739the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6740way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6741
6742*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6743robust and a lot faster.
6744
6745*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6746
6747*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6748to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6749documentation for more details.
6750
6751** Changes in Enriched mode.
6752
6753*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6754filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6755of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6756use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6757the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6758
6759*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6760distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6761as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6762as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6763
6764** Font Lock mode
6765
6766*** Custom support
6767
6768The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6769font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6770faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6771group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6772your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6773consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6774
6775You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6776
6777*** Maximum decoration
6778
6779Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6780default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6781of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6782supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6783to get the old behavior.
6784
6785*** New support
6786
6787Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6788
6789Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6790support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6791
6792*** Configurable support
6793
6794Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6795additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6796c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6797java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6798list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6799of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6800convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6801
6802Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6803way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6804it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6805
6806*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6807
6808You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6809highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6810for any mode.
6811
6812For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6813
6814 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6815
6816in your ~/.emacs.
6817
6818*** New faces
6819
6820Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6821font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6822distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6823to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6824
6825*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6826
6827The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6828cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6829same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6830
6831*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6832
6833The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6834according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6835the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6836non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6837refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6838the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6839Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6840
6841This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6842For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6843this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6844refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6845containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6846the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6847
6848As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6849
6850Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6851Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6852Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6853new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6854
6855If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6856settings.
6857
6858** Ada mode changes.
6859
6860*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6861If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6862procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6863you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6864stubs.
6865
6866*** There are two new commands:
6867 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6868 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6869
6870The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6871`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6872`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6873
6874*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6875is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6876Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6877
6878*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6879formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6880places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6881space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6882
6883** Scheme mode changes.
6884
6885*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6886mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6887for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6888with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6889have any effect.
6890
6891If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6892still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6893scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6894variables as buffer-local variables.
6895
6896*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6897Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6898
6899** Changes to the emacsclient program
6900
6901*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6902USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6903associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6904can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6905
6906*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6907it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6908buffer in Emacs.
6909
6910*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6911use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6912ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6913option takes precedence.
6914
6915** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6916constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6917(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6918
6919** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6920which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6921the current defun.
6922
6923** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6924following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6925
6926** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6927and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6928necessary).
6929
6930** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6931if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6932these register values no longer become completely useless.
6933If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6934asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6935it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6936
6937** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6938example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6939be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6940you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6941
6942You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6943variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6944file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6945revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6946only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6947
6948** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6949since it applies only to the current frame.
6950
6951** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6952file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6953and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6954
6955This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6956multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6957variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6958tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6959instead of just the file you are editing.
6960
6961** RefTeX mode
6962
6963RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6964and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6965different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6966multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6967turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6968
6969C-c ( reftex-label
6970 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6971 knows which kind of label is needed.
6972
6973C-c ) reftex-reference
6974 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6975 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6976
6977C-c [ reftex-citation
6978 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6979 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6980
6981C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6982 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6983
6984C-c = reftex-toc
6985 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6986 can quickly jump to every section.
6987
6988Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6989commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6990Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6991reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6992C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6993
6994** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6995
6996*** Info documentation is now available.
6997
6998*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6999both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7000
7001*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7002bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7003
7004*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7005(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7006
7007*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7008entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7009appropriate functions.
7010
7011*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7012entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7013
7014*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7015been cleaned.
7016
7017*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7018bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7019
7020*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7021shall be delimited.
7022
7023*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7024bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7025bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7026
7027*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7028field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7029prefixed with `ALT'.
7030
7031*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7032bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7033formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7034documentation).
7035
7036*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7037documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7038for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7039
7040*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7041comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7042
7043*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7044alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7045signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7046
7047*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7048
7049*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7050
7051*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7052from alien sources.
7053
7054*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7055to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7056crossref entries.
7057
7058*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7059region.
7060
7061*** Added support for imenu.
7062
7063*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7064of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7065`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7066`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7067
7068*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7069from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7070
7071** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7072
7073** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7074
7075** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7076functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7077Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7078as an argument.
7079
7080When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7081and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7082
7083** browse-url changes
7084
7085*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7086Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7087(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7088non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7089customization variables.
7090
7091*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7092
7093*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7094lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7095(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7096
7097** Changes in Ediff
7098
7099*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7100pops up the Info file for this command.
7101
7102*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7103the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7104merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7105directories).
7106
7107*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7108and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7109files in the same directory.
7110
7111*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7112The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7113related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7114
7115** Changes in Viper
7116
7117*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7118*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7119 instead of vip-.
7120*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7121*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7122Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7123*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7124*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7125*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7126color when Viper is in insert state.
7127*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7128Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7129viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7130
7131** Etags changes.
7132
7133*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7134default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7135Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7136variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7137not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7138
7139*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7140
7141*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7142constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7143
7144*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7145recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7146In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7147
7148*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7149C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7150recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7151methods and protocols.
7152
7153*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7154.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7155column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7156paragraph name.
7157
7158*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7159an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7160at least M times and as many as N times.
7161
7162** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7163in files has changed slightly.
7164
7165With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7166time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7167This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7168with old time-stamp-format values.
7169
7170In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7171(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7172This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7173reasons.
7174
7175In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7176natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7177fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7178(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7179time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7180specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7181
7182Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7183case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7184truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7185
7186The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7187being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7188future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7189recommended now will continue to work then.
7190
7191See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7192details.
7193
7194** There are some additional major modes:
7195
7196dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7197m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7198meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7199
7200** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7201copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7202into Emacs.
7203
7204** New Lisp packages include:
7205
7206*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7207
7208*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7209be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7210
7211*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7212
7213*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7214in shell buffers.
7215
7216*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7217See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7218and `elint-defun'.
7219
7220*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7221meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7222ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7223strings or comments.
7224
7225These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7226abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7227you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7228insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7229at these points.
7230
7231*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7232can visit them by short forms of their names.
7233
7234*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7235Emacs Lisp function at point.
7236
7237*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7238
7239*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7240switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7241
7242*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7243
7244*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7245
7246*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7247
7248*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7249from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7250
7251*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7252You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7253inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7254original place after inserting the copy.
7255
7256*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7257on the buffer.
7258
7259You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7260velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7261(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7262
7263Enable mouse-drag with:
7264 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7265-or-
7266 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7267
7268*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7269mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7270
7271*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7272It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7273
7274*** ogonek
7275
7276The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7277Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7278platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7279TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7280ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7281prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7282instance) and vice versa.
7283
7284To use this package load it using
7285 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7286Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7287 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7288 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7289The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7290ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7291
7292*** Interface to ph.
7293
7294Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7295
7296The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7297services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7298these servers.
7299
7300*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7301
7302*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7303You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7304while the real cursor does not move.
7305
7306*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7307for visiting your favorite web sites.
7308
7309*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7310so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7311
7312** movemail change
7313
7314Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7315mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7316supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7317user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7318
7319This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7320\f
7321* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7322
7323** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7324
7325Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7326end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7327Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7328file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7329file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7330
7331To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7332C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7333coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7334specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7335LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7336save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7337\f
7338* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7339
7340** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7341Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7342vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7343Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7344
7345** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7346to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7347
7348In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7349don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7350"win".
7351
7352** Basic Lisp changes
7353
7354*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7355evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7356
7357*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7358be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7359or by the user.
7360
7361The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7362
7363*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7364
7365(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7366(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7367
7368*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7369usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7370its argument.
7371
7372*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7373
7374*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7375
7376*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7377
7378*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7379error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7380include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7381`format' function.
7382
7383*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7384or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7385whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7386
7387*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7388either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7389adding one of these suffixes.
7390
7391*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7392which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7393If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7394
7395We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7396because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7397
7398*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7399
7400*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7401You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7402
7403*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7404conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7405
7406 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7407
7408BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7409BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7410
7411*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7412choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7413restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7414works using `save-current-buffer'.
7415
7416*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7417write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7418of the last form.
7419
7420*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7421which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7422last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7423as the last form.
7424
7425*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7426characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7427matches.
7428
7429For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7430
7431*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7432with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7433Then it returns that string.
7434
7435For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7436
7437(with-output-to-string
7438 (princ "The buffer is ")
7439 (princ (buffer-name)))
7440
7441returns "The buffer is foo".
7442
7443** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7444is non-nil.
7445
7446These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7447buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7448characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7449
7450*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7451a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7452
7453Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7454character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7455Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7456position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7457characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7458 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7459
7460ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7461Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7462non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7463characters".
7464
7465The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7466through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7467"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7468range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7469leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7470
7471*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7472(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7473multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7474character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7475
7476This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7477always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7478
7479However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7480
7481*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7482because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7483have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7484the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7485guaranteed.
7486
7487*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7488between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7489character).
7490
7491When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7492
7493 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7494 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7495 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7496 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7497 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7498
7499*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7500
7501*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7502`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7503more than the number of characters.
7504
7505You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7506it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7507\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7508is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7509follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7510newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7511
7512*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7513and returns a string containing those characters.
7514
7515*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7516(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7517counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7518character, sref signals an error.
7519
7520*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7521in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7522string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7523
7524*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7525in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7526region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7527
7528*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7529the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7530to a vector of the characters in it.
7531
7532*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7533of a string. You call it as follows:
7534
7535 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7536
7537This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7538STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7539This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7540Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7541it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7542
7543*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7544if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7545
7546*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7547if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7548
7549*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7550to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7551not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7552which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7553
7554(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7555
7556This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7557
7558The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7559If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7560are not included in the resulting value.
7561
7562The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7563at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7564WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7565is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7566
7567If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7568place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7569character extends across that column), then the padding character
7570PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7571string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7572column START-COLUMN.
7573
7574*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7575the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7576necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7577difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7578changed text, before the change.
7579
7580*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7581sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7582one character set for each script, not for each language.
7583
7584**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7585
7586**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7587
7588**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7589set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7590
7591**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7592name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7593which identify the character within that character set.
7594
7595**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7596byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7597opposite of split-char.
7598
7599**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7600of all the characters between BEG and END.
7601
7602**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7603of all the characters in a string.
7604
7605*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7606and specifying coding systems.
7607
7608**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7609system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7610of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7611(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7612and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7613as what to do about code conversion.)
7614
7615**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7616name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7617
7618**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7619for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7620except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7621
7622Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7623which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7624to match against a file name.
7625
7626VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7627a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7628decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7629to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7630systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7631specifies the coding system for encoding.
7632
7633If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7634or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7635
7636**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7637the coding system to use for network sockets.
7638
7639Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7640which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7641either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7642service names.
7643
7644VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7645a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7646decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7647to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7648systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7649specifies the coding system for encoding.
7650
7651If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7652or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7653
7654**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7655for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7656except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7657start the subprocess.
7658
7659**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7660systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7661when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7662(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7663to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7664
7665**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7666coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7667subprocess.
7668
7669It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7670but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7671start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7672connection permanently or until overridden.
7673
7674The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7675file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7676network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7677coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7678It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7679system for one operation at a time.
7680
7681**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7682files, subprocesses or network connections.
7683
7684**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7685coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7686The value is a cons cell,
7687 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7688where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7689the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7690input to the subprocess.
7691
7692**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7693change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7694
7695** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7696customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7697you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7698
7699You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7700variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7701information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7702legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7703customization.
7704
7705Thus, instead of writing
7706
7707 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7708 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7709
7710you would now write this:
7711
7712 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7713 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7714 :type 'boolean
7715 :group foo)
7716
7717The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7718two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7719describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7720for a description of them.
7721
7722The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7723should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7724
7725 (defgroup ispell nil
7726 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7727 :group 'processes)
7728
7729The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7730group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7731but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7732to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7733second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7734
7735Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7736package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7737have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7738package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7739first-level subgroups.
7740
7741** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7742
7743This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7744separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7745
7746** easy-mmode
7747
7748The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7749developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7750only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7751predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7752`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7753`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7754
7755** Text property changes
7756
7757*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7758text property.
7759
7760*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7761previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7762place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7763functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7764starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7765
7766If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7767LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7768of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7769position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7770
7771*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7772value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7773is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7774
7775** Changes in invisibility features
7776
7777*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7778hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7779is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7780should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7781would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7782make the overlay visible.
7783
7784During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7785invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7786needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7787which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7788the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7789t when it should hide it.
7790
7791*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7792
7793Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7794invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7795and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7796Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7797manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7798Here is an example of how to do this:
7799
7800 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7801 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7802 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7803 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7804
7805 ...
7806 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7807
7808 ...
7809 ;; When done with the overlays:
7810 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7811 ;; Or respectively:
7812 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7813
7814** Changes in syntax parsing.
7815
7816*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7817`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7818obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7819`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7820
7821If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7822is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7823used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7824
7825When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7826character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7827
7828 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7829 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7830
7831 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7832 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7833 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7834
7835 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7836 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7837 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7838 determine the syntax type of the character.
7839
7840 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7841 of the current buffer.
7842
7843*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7844value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7845for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7846
7847*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7848and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7849only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7850character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7851another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7852
7853These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7854text property.
7855
7856*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7857arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7858of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7859
7860*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7861(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7862element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7863nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7864string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7865
7866*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7867syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7868`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7869
7870** Changes in face features
7871
7872*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7873if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7874
7875*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7876of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7877
7878*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7879set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7880
7881*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7882set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7883
7884*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7885by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7886and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7887the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7888overlay property).
7889
7890This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7891arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7892
7893** Changes in file-handling functions
7894
7895*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7896directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7897they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7898is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7899
7900This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7901begins with ~.
7902
7903*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7904it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7905
7906*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7907the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7908
7909*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7910as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7911
7912*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7913character code conversion as well as other things.
7914
7915Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7916(formerly it did not).
7917
7918*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7919environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7920
7921*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7922instead of constant strings.
7923
7924*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7925to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7926any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7927
7928substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7929in the same way as before.
7930
7931*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7932The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7933which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7934
7935*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7936error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7937else, and returns nil.
7938
7939*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7940directory cannot be listed.
7941
7942** Changes in minibuffer input
7943
7944*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7945read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7946additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7947argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7948ways:
7949
7950 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7951 It is available through the history command M-n.
7952
7953*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7954read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7955argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7956minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7957enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7958
7959In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7960argument in this way.
7961
7962*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7963from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7964minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7965
7966** Echo area features
7967
7968*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7969echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7970minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7971after the echo area is cleared.
7972
7973*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7974in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7975
7976** Keyboard input features
7977
7978*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7979set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7980
7981*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7982received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7983by keyboard macros.
7984
7985** Frame-related changes
7986
7987*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7988creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7989hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7990
7991*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7992the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7993has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7994
7995*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7996selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7997value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7998in the selected frame.
7999
8000*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8001is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8002which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8003
8004** X Windows features
8005
8006*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8007x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8008x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8009
8010*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8011The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8012
8013*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8014MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8015A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8016
8017If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8018it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8019
8020** Subprocess features
8021
8022*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8023functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8024automatically.
8025
8026*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8027and returns the output from the command as a string.
8028
8029*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8030and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8031
8032** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8033does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8034
8035** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8036at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8037goes after the other menu items.
8038
8039** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8040of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8041around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8042are in use.
8043
8044The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8045series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8046
8047Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8048after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8049form.
8050
8051** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8052is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8053but its hook is still run.
8054
8055** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8056for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8057
8058If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8059regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8060useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8061
8062This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8063are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8064filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8065warned.
8066
8067** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8068way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8069
8070** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8071integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8072functions like display-time.
8073
8074** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8075name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8076
8077** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8078can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8079is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8080
8081** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8082if there is an error in compilation.
8083
8084** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8085switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8086argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8087they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8088
8089** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8090Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8091the *scratch* buffer.
8092
8093** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8094The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8095where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8096e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8097
8098** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8099and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8100It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8101
8102** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8103using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8104variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8105and compose-mail-other-frame.
8106
8107** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8108can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8109full name of the specified user will be returned.
8110
8111** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8112of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8113where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8114in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8115option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8116files at all.
8117
8118** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8119and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8120width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8121the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8122
8123For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8124minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8125with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8126is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8127
8128** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8129
8130** imenu.el changes.
8131
8132You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8133item from menu created by imenu.
8134
8135An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8136#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8137select one of those items.
8138\f
8139* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8140\f
8141* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8142
8143** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8144mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8145
8146** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8147use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8148Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8149\f
8150* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8151
8152** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8153To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8154
8155** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8156conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8157matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8158expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8159word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8160all caps.
8161
8162** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8163at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8164
8165When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8166does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8167as in previous Emacs versions.
8168
8169** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8170non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8171time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8172frames.
8173
8174** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8175if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8176This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8177Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8178accident.
8179
8180** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8181keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8182It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8183line and then executing the macro.
8184
8185This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8186
8187** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8188(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8189characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8190characters.
8191
8192** Font Lock mode
8193
8194*** Font Lock support modes
8195
8196Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8197below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8198hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8199to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8200Font Lock mode is enabled.
8201
8202For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8203
8204 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8205
8206in your ~/.emacs.
8207
8208*** lazy-lock
8209
8210The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8211only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8212becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8213Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8214occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8215buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8216Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8217
8218To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8219
8220 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8221
8222To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8223
8224** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8225
8226*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8227paren and key.
8228
8229*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8230supported.
8231
8232** Gnus changes.
8233
8234Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8235commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8236significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8237previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8238
8239Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8240between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8241
8242*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8243variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8244obsolete.
8245
8246*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8247missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8248
8249 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8250
8251*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8252
8253 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8254
8255*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8256referred.
8257
8258*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8259
8260 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8261
8262*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8263
8264 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8265
8266*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8267buffers.
8268
8269 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8270
8271*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8272
8273 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8274
8275*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8276
8277 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8278
8279*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8280
8281 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8282
8283*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8284is possible.
8285
8286 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8287
8288*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8289groups of groups.
8290
8291*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8292
8293*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8294batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8295
8296*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8297
8298*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8299
8300*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8301
8302 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8303
8304*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8305expiration times.
8306
8307*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8308
8309*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8310process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8311
8312*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8313articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8314bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8315
8316*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8317articles with the `*' command.
8318
8319*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8320
8321*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8322
8323 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8324
8325*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8326
8327*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8328`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8329
8330*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8331buffer.
8332
8333*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8334
8335*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8336
8337*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8338
8339 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8340
8341*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8342
8343 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8344
8345*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8346
8347*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8348
8349*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8350
8351 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8352 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8353
8354*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8355refetching.
8356
8357 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8358
8359*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8360buffer to allow easier treatment.
8361
8362*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8363
8364*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8365
8366 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8367
8368*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8369articles.
8370
8371 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8372
8373*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8374
8375*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8376cited text to hide is now customizable.
8377
8378 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8379
8380*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8381
8382 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8383
8384*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8385
8386*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8387
8388The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8389in greater detail.
8390\f
8391* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8392
8393** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8394second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8395asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8396exists.
8397
8398** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8399as well as lists.
8400
8401** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8402of a given keymap.
8403
8404** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8405given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8406keymap or nil.
8407
8408** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8409an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8410name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8411menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8412equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8413alias.
8414\f
8415* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8416
8417** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8418
8419Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8420This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8421was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8422far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8423pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8424
8425For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8426you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8427`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8428
8429** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8430
8431The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8432do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8433It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8434much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8435chapter of the manual for details.
8436
8437However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8438customization variables take effect.
8439
8440** Marking with the mouse.
8441
8442When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8443highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8444using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8445
8446** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8447
8448*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8449
8450*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8451to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8452
8453*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8454in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8455you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8456application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8457applications, these problems are significant.
8458
8459If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8460likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8461However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8462will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8463other DOS application as a subprocess.
8464
8465Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8466You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8467
8468If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8469subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8470have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8471Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8472separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8473Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8474
8475** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8476
8477This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8478which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8479minibuffer contains.
8480
8481** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8482
8483The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8484It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8485It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8486affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8487
8488The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8489it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8490and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8491when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8492
8493** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8494enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8495
8496** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8497F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8498Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8499
8500If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8501menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8502something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8503the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8504
8505 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8506
8507** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8508to replace the characters it "deletes".
8509
8510** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8511
8512** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8513a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8514select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8515It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8516immediately after the selected one.
8517
8518This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8519made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8520
8521** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8522
8523Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8524directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8525If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8526Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8527recover-session.
8528
8529You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8530auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8531will not work.
8532
8533Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8534normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8535this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8536bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8537now that the bug is fixed.
8538
8539** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8540
8541There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8542when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8543Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8544which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8545
8546If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8547telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8548VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8549the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8550
8551** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8552Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8553is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8554
8555There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8556Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8557enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8558The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8559remain normal.
8560
8561** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8562header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8563
8564Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8565known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8566offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8567Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8568
8569Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8570of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8571a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8572name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8573documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8574`mail-directory-stream'.)
8575
8576** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8577skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8578characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8579with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8580
8581Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8582- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8583wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8584
8585The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8586less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8587headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8588Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8589Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8590fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8591to a limitation in font-lock).
8592
8593External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8594
8595** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8596buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8597buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8598this example:
8599
8600 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8601 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8602
8603** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8604
8605*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8606
8607*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8608
8609*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8610
8611*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8612entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8613will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8614isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8615(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8616The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8617
8618*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8619does the same job.
8620
8621*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8622"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8623
8624*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8625text.
8626
8627** Font Lock mode
8628
8629*** Global Font Lock mode
8630
8631Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8632new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8633font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8634turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8635on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8636
8637For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8638
8639 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8640
8641in your ~/.emacs.
8642
8643*** Local Refontification
8644
8645In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8646However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8647those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8648command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8649
8650In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8651(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8652current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8653above and below point.
8654
8655With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8656
8657** Follow mode
8658
8659Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8660buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8661side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8662they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8663split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8664follow-mode.
8665
8666M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8667
8668To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8669command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8670
8671** hide-show changes.
8672
8673The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8674to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8675normal hooks.
8676
8677** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8678The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8679
8680** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8681recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8682those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8683
8684** MSDOS Changes
8685
8686*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8687Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8688
8689*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8690and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8691
8692*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8693
8694*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8695pressing both mouse buttons.
8696
8697*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8698restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8699are:
8700
8701**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8702now works.
8703
8704**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8705
8706**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8707implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8708
8709**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8710
8711**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8712
8713**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8714
8715**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8716
8717**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8718\f
8719* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8720
8721** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8722tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8723remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8724this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8725behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8726
8727** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8728
8729The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8730not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8731need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8732be different.
8733
8734It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8735than `system-type'.
8736
8737See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8738
8739** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8740now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8741
8742** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8743that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8744
8745** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8746no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8747reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8748
8749The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8750to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8751like this:
8752
8753 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8754
8755SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8756It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8757becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8758
8759REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8760seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8761means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8762
8763*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8764up if too much time passes.
8765
8766 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8767
8768This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8769If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8770of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8771form in BODY.
8772
8773*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8774a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8775call looks like this:
8776
8777 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8778
8779SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8780runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8781timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8782ARGS.
8783
8784Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8785command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8786command.
8787
8788REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8789time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8790does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8791each time Emacs becomes idle.
8792
8793If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8794idle for SECS seconds.
8795
8796*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8797all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8798programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8799instead.
8800
8801*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8802there is no answer within a certain time.
8803
8804 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8805
8806asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8807within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8808Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8809
8810** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8811arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8812meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8813arguments in between are ignored.
8814
8815This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8816the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8817
8818** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8819/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8820/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8821site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8822version.
8823
8824It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8825version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8826for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8827has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8828and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8829problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8830
8831** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8832.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8833systems with limited file name syntax.
8834
8835Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8836convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8837for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8838completions.el:
8839
8840(defvar save-completions-file-name
8841 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8842 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8843
8844This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8845depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8846convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8847Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8848MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8849
8850** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8851rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8852minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8853
8854** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8855marker from its buffer position.
8856
8857** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8858Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8859The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8860
8861** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8862that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8863condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8864of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8865matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8866regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8867
8868This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8869errors that happen often during editing.
8870
8871** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8872into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8873puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8874
8875** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8876now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8877
8878** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8879a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8880name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8881to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8882and not get-buffer-window.
8883
8884** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8885calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8886being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8887
8888If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8889buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8890property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8891non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8892are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8893property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8894over and over for the same text.
8895
8896** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8897
8898*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8899in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8900
8901;; @(#) HEADER: text
8902;; $HEADER: text $
8903
8904in addition to the normal
8905
8906;; HEADER: text
8907
8908*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8909checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8910lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8911
8912
a933dad1 8913\f
3787e12e 8914* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8915
8916----------------------------------------------------------------------
8917Copyright information:
8918
424d8b44 8919Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8920
8921 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8922 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8923 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8924 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8925
8926 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8927 of this document, or of portions of it,
8928 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8929 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8930\f
8931Local variables:
8932mode: outline
8933paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8934end: